Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Service Manual: e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/ 8508A
Service Manual: e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/ 8508A
Model: DP-5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
Publish Date: June 2016
File No. SME150034D0
R151221R9203-TTEC
Ver04 F_2019-04
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows® Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista Operating System.
• The official name of Windows® 7 is Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows® 8.1 is Microsoft Windows 8.1 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows® 10 is Microsoft Windows 10 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server® 2008 is Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server® 2012 is Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Operating System.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft
products are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, Mac, Mac OS, Safari, iPhone, iPod touch, TrueType, AirPrint, AirPrint
logo, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
• Adobe, Acrobat, Reader, and PostScript are trademarks or Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Mozilla®, Firefox® and the Firefox logo® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Mozilla
Foundation in the U.S. and other countries.
• IBM, AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• NOVELL®, NetWare® and NDS® are trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• FLOIL® is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei CO., Ltd.
• MOLYKOTE® is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• KAPTON® is a registered trademark of E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
• Sankol® is a registered trademark of SANKEIKAGAKU CO.,Ltd.
• e-STUDIO, e-BRIDGE, and TopAccess are trademarks of Toshiba Tec Corporation.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.
1. Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two or more persons and be sure to move it
by the casters while lifting the stoppers.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 195 kg (429.9 lb.), therefore pay full
attention when handling it.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or DSDF) when
transporting the equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 120 V / 20 A, 220-240 V / 10 A for its power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 30
cm (11.8”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be easily accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
- If the unpacking place and where the equipment is to be installed differ, perform image quality
adjustment (automatic gamma adjustment) according to the temperature and humidity of the
place of installation and the paper to be used.
- When the equipment is used after the option is removed, be sure to install the parts or the covers
which have been taken off so that the inside of the equipment is not exposed.
- Do not use an ozone generator near the MFP. Or, place any ozone generator as far away from
the MFP as possible.
- When the LAN cable, USB cable or telephone line is connected, be sure to wire the cable or line
by passing it through the clamp of the rear cover.
Otherwise, they will be caught when the duplexing unit is opened/closed and thus may be
damaged.
2. General Precautions at Service
- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cables during service (except for the
service should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using an
antistatic wrist strap since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the antistatic wrist strap, unplug the power cable of the
equipment and make sure that there are no charged objects which are not
insulated in the vicinity.
- Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,
developer, IH board, high-voltage transformer and power supply unit. Especially, the board of
these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors,
etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
- Do not leave plastic bags where children can get at them. This may cause an accident such as
suffocation if a child puts his/her head into a bag. Plastic bags of options or service parts must be
brought back.
- There is a risk of an electric shock or fire resulting from the damage to the harness covering or
conduction blockage. To avoid this, be sure to wire the harness in the same way as that before
disassembling when the equipment is assembled/disassembled.
3. General operations
- Check the procedures and perform them as described in the Service Manual.
- Make sure you do not lose your balance.
- Avoid exposure to your skin and wear protective gloves as needed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
13.8
[7] [8]
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem
Handbuch.
1. Precautions for Transporting Equipment Once Unpacked
Item Content
(1) Scanning section Fix the scanning section.
(2) Drum Install the drum protection sheet and the drum fixing holder.
(3) Toner Install sealing material on the toner supply opening of each toner
cartridge.
Remarks:
• Keep packing material removed at unpacking to reuse it in steps (1) and (2) above.
Notes:
• The installation of rubber caps for covering the holes of the scanner fixing screws, which is
described in the Unpacking Instructions, must not be performed when the equipment is
unpacked but must be when it is reinstalled at a user's office. (Large: 9 pcs. , Small: 2 pcs.)
• The installation of the front lower cover, which is described in the Unpacking Instructions,
must not be performed when the equipment is unpacked but must when it is set up at a user's
office.
2
2.2 Attach the cushioning material of the scanning section
When transporting the equipment with the DSDF installed, be sure to attach the cushioning material as
below to prevent the cover in the scanner section from being scratched by the protrusion of the DSDF
cover.
1. Fold the cushioning material (packing material) in two. (Utilize the packing material used in the
rear cover section, if available.) Place it on the upper surface of the scanner section so that it is
covered.
2. While paying attention to ensure that the cushioning material is not moved, slowly close the
DSDF.
2.3 Install the drum protection sheet and the drum fixing holder.
1. Pull out the EPU tray.
P. 4-103"4.6.1 Pulling out the process unit (EPU tray)"
3. Place the drum fixing holder on the specified position and press it in until a sound is heard.
4. Push the EPU tray in, and then reassemble the equipment in the procedure reverse to
disassembly.
Notes:
• It is recommended to keep the drum protection sheet and the drum fixing holder removed at
unpacking.
• Store the drum protection sheet in a place without high temperature and humidity, direct
sunlight or dust.
• Do not scratch or bend the drum protection sheet. Avoid adhesion of dust, dirt or foreign
matter, especially things that may damage the surface of the drum or the transfer belt (e.g.
hard matter or matter that is highly adhesive, organic or chemical matter, grease) to the drum
protection sheet.
• Do not use a drum protection sheet that is damaged or deformed, or one with any
abnormality.
2.4 Installing the sealing material in toner supply opening
1. Open the front cover and then take off the toner cartridge.
Notes:
The toner cartridge must not be installed while the equipment is being transported. Pack it
separately from the equipment.
2. Install PLATE-TONER-SEAL (6LJ06917000) in the toner supply opening of the toner cartridge.
Then close the front cover.
Notes:
• Pay attention to prevent dust from entering into the toner supply openings.
• When installing PLATE-TONER-SEAL (6LJ06917000), be careful not to scratch or remove
the sponge that is already attached to the toner supply openings.
2.5 Attaching packaging tape to the accessory tray
When an optional accessory tray is installed, be sure to fix it with packaging tape.
ALLGEMEINE SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN IN BEZUG AUF
DIE WARTUNG FÜR e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
Die Installation und die Wartung sind von einem qualifizierten Service-
Techniker durchzuführen.
1. Transport/Installation
- Zum Transportieren/Installieren des Gerätes werden 2 Personen benötigt. Bewegen Sie es mit den
Rollen, während Sie die Absperrvorrichtungen heben. Das Gerät ist sehr schwer und wiegt etwa
195 kg; deshalb muss bei der Handhabung des Geräts besonders aufgepasst werden
- Beim Transportieren des Geräts nicht an den beweglichen Teilen oder Einheiten (z.B. das
Bedienungsfeld, die Duplexeinheit oder die automatische Dokumentenzuführung) halten.
- Eine spezielle Steckdose mit Stromversorgung von AC 120V/20A, 220-240V/10A als
Stromquelle verwenden.
- Das Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden.
- Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen. Standorte mit zuviel Hitze, hoher
Luftfeuchtigkeit, Staub, Vibration und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden.
- Für ausreichende Belüftung sorgen, da das Gerät etwas Ozon abgibt.
- Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten, muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm
links, 80 cm rechts und 10 cm dahinter eingehalten werden.
- Das Gerät ist in der Nähe der Steckdose zu installieren; diese muss leicht zu erreichen sein.
- Nach der Installation muss das Netzkabel richtig hineingesteckt und befestigt werden, damit
niemand darüber stolpern kann.
- Falls der Auspackungsstandort und der Installationsstandort des Geräts verschieden sind, die
Bildqualitätsjustierung (automatische Gammajustierung) je nach der Temperatur und
Luftfeuchtigkeit des Installationsstandorts und der Papiersorte, die verwendet wird, durchführen.
- Wenn das Gerät nach der Entfernung der Extras verwendet wird, die entfernten Teile oder
Abdeckungen anbringen, damit das Innere des Gerät nicht freiliegt.
- Wenn LAN-Kabel, USB-Kabel oder die Telefonleitung angeschlossen sind, müssen diese Kabel
durch die Klemme an der Rückwand verlegt werden.
Ansonsten können sie beim Öffnen/Schließen der Duplexeinheit eingeklemmt und beschädigt werden.
Vorsicht: Vor Benutzung der Manschette der Betätigung des Armbandes, das Netzkabel des
Gerätes herausziehen und prüfen, dass es in der Nähe keine geladenen
Gegenstände, die nicht isoliert sind, gibt.
- Setzen Sie sich während der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus. Dieses Gerät ist mit
einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den Laserstrahl zu
blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in den Pfad des
Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten sämtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstände, wie
Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochtemperaturbereiche, wie die Belichtungslampe, die Fixiereinheit, die
Heizquelle und die umliegenden Bereiche, berühren.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochspannungsbereiche, wie die Ladeeinheiten, das Transferband, die zweite
Transferwalze, die Entwicklereinheit, den Hochspannungstransformator und das Netzgerät,
berühren. Insbesondere sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berührt werden, da die
Kondensatoren usw. auch nach dem Ausschalten des Geräts noch elektrisch geladen sein
können.
- Vor dem Berühren potenziell gefährlicher Bereiche (z. B. drehbare oder betriebsrelevante
Bereiche, wie Zahnräder, Riemen, Riemenscheiben, Lüfter und die Laseraustrittsöffnung der
optischen Lasereinheit) sicherstellen, dass das Gerät sich nicht bedienen lässt.
- Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen, da sich darunter scharfkantige
Komponenten befinden können.
- Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
- Ausschließlich vorgesehene Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel verwenden.
- Empfohlene oder gleichwertige Messgeräte verwenden.
- Nach Abschluss der Wartungsarbeiten das Gerät in den ursprünglichen Zustand zurück
versetzen und den einwandfreien Betrieb überprüfen.
- Das berührungsempfindliche Bedienungsfeld stets vorsichtig handhaben und keinen Stößen
aussetzen. Wenn die Oberfläche beschädigt wird, kann dies zu Funktionsstörungen führen.
- Bewahren Sie Kunststofftüten kindersicher auf. Es besteht Erstickungsgefahr, wenn sich Kinder
beim Spielen eine Kunststofftüte über den Kopf ziehen. Bitte nehmen Sie die Kunststofftüten von
Optionen oder Serviceparts wieder zurück.
- Wenn der Schutzmantel eines Kabels oder die Steckerisolierung beschädigt werden, besteht
Brandgefahr oder die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlags. Um dies zu vermeiden, sollten Kabel in
der gleichen Weise verlegt werden, wie sie vor der Demontage/dem Transport verlegt waren.
3. Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen
- Die Verfahren sind zu überprüfen und wie im Wartungshandbuch beschrieben durchzuführen.
- Vorsichtig, dass Sie nicht umfallen.
- Um Kontakt zur Haut zu vermeiden, tragen Sie wenn nötig Schutzhandschuhe.
4. Sicherheitsrelevante Wartungsteile
- Der Leistungsschutzschalter, die IH-Spule, der Türschalter, die Sicherung, der Thermostat, die
Thermosicherung, der Thermistor, die Akkus, die IC-RAMs einschließlich der Lithium-Batterie
sind besonders sicherheitsrelevant. Sie müssen unbedingt korrekt gehandhabt und installiert
werden. Wenn diese Teile kurzgeschlossen und funktionsunfähig werden, kann dies zu
schwerwiegenden Schäden, wie einer Explosion oder einem Abbrand, führen. Kurzschlüsse sind
zu vermeiden, und es sind ausschließlich Teile zu verwenden, die von der Toshiba Tec
Corporation empfohlen sind.
5. Warnetiketten
- Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen, um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät
angebracht sind.
[1]
[2]
[3]
13.8
[7] [8]
1) Erkennungsetikett
2) Erklärungsetikett
3) Warnung für das Stromkabel
4) Warnung für Bereiche mit hohen Temperaturen (Duplexeinheit / Fixiereinheit)
5) Warnung für Bereiche mit hohen Temperaturen (Fixiereinheit)
6) Warnung für Bereiche mit hohen Temperaturen (Brückeneinheit)
7) Warnung für den Laser
8) Warnung für die Anti-Kondensationsheizung (für ARD, AUD, ASD, CND)
6. Entsorgung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs
- In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und
Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs, einschließlich Lithiumakkus, sind die
einschlägigen nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem
Handbuch.
• Laseremissionseinheit
Diese Einheit besteht aus der Laserdiode, dem Fokussierungsobjektiv, der Blende und dem
Zylinderobjektiv.
Laserdiode
Diese Laserdiode zeichnet sich durch eine geringe Regeldifferenz, eine kleine Laservariation und einen
niedrigen Schwellenstrom aus.
Die Blende der Laseremissionseinheit ist unter dem Fokussierobjektiv angeordnet, um die Form der
Laserstrahlen in der primären und sekundären Scanrichtung festzulegen.
Die Laserdiode gibt Laserstrahlen als Reaktion auf die Signale der Laseremissionssteuerung (ein/aus)
von der Lasertreiber-PC-Platine (LDR) aus. Die durch das Fokussierobjektiv geführten Laserstrahlen
werden auf die Trommeloberfläche fokussiert.
Warnhinweise:
Setzen Sie sich während der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus.
Dieses Gerät ist mit einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den
Laserstrahl zu blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in den
Pfad des Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten sämtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstände,
wie Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren oder
betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen [z. B. „Unplug the power cable during service“ („Netzkabel vor Beginn der Wartungsarbeiten
abziehen“), „CAUTION. HOT“ („VORSICHT, HEISS“), „CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE“ („VORSICHT,
HOCHSPANNUNG“), „CAUTION. LASER BEAM“ („VORSICHT, LASER“) usw.], um sicherzustellen,
dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät angebracht sind.
CONTENTS
1. FEATURE...................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Main Feature of e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A................................................... 1-1
2. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 2-1
2.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 General .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Copy .................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.3 Print ................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.4 Scan................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.5 e-Filing ............................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.6 Internet Fax...................................................................................................... 2-10
2.1.7 Network Fax (optional)..................................................................................... 2-10
2.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3 System List ..................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.4 Options............................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.5 Supplies .......................................................................................................................... 2-14
3. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Sectional View................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Front side ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Rear side ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Electric Parts Layout ......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components ............................................................ 3-27
3.3.1 Motors.............................................................................................................. 3-27
3.3.2 Fans................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.3.3 Sensors............................................................................................................ 3-29
3.3.4 Switches .......................................................................................................... 3-33
3.3.5 Electromagnetic spring clutches ...................................................................... 3-34
3.3.6 Solenoids ......................................................................................................... 3-34
3.3.7 PC boards........................................................................................................ 3-34
3.3.8 Lamps, coils, and heaters ................................................................................ 3-35
3.3.9 Thermistors and thermostats ........................................................................... 3-36
3.3.10 Transformer ..................................................................................................... 3-36
3.3.11 Others .............................................................................................................. 3-36
3.4 Copy Process.................................................................................................................. 3-37
3.5 Comparison with e-STUDIO657/857............................................................................... 3-38
3.6 General Operation........................................................................................................... 3-40
3.6.1 Overview of Operation ..................................................................................... 3-40
3.6.2 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-41
3.6.3 Detection of Abnormality.................................................................................. 3-44
3.6.4 Hibernation function ......................................................................................... 3-49
3.7 Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 3-50
3.7.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-50
3.8 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.2 Construction..................................................................................................... 3-52
3.8.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-53
3.8.4 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-55
3.8.5 Process of detection of original size ................................................................ 3-56
3.9 Laser Optical Unit............................................................................................................ 3-58
3.9.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-58
3.9.2 Laser precautions ............................................................................................ 3-59
3.9.3 Slit glass cleaning mechanism......................................................................... 3-60
3.10 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 3-61
3.10.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................... 3-61
3.10.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-63
© 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
CONTENTS
1
3.10.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-64
3.10.4 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-66
3.11 Process Unit Related Section ......................................................................................... 3-72
3.11.1 General description.......................................................................................... 3-72
3.11.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-74
3.11.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-75
3.11.4 Electric Circuit Description ............................................................................... 3-78
3.11.5 Functions of the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG) ......................................... 3-79
3.12 Transfer unit .................................................................................................................... 3-82
3.12.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................... 3-82
3.12.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-83
3.12.3 Self steering mechanism ................................................................................. 3-84
3.13 Image Quality Control ..................................................................................................... 3-85
3.13.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-85
3.14 Fuser Unit........................................................................................................................ 3-86
3.14.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-86
3.14.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-87
3.14.3 Pressure mechanism ...................................................................................... 3-87
3.14.4 Electric Circuit Description ............................................................................... 3-88
3.15 Exit / Reverse / Duplex Section....................................................................................... 3-92
3.15.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-92
3.15.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-95
3.15.3 Description of Operations ................................................................................ 3-96
3.16 Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF)............................................................................. 3-99
3.16.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-99
3.16.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS................................................................ 3-100
3.17 Power Supply Unit......................................................................................................... 3-111
3.17.1 General Description ....................................................................................... 3-111
3.17.2 Composition ................................................................................................... 3-111
3.17.3 Operation of DC Output Circuits .................................................................... 3-112
3.17.4 Output Channel.............................................................................................. 3-114
3.17.5 Fuse............................................................................................................... 3-115
4. DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT ......................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Disassembly and Replacement of Covers ........................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Front lower cover ............................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Front cover......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Top right cover................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 Right top cover................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.5 Front right cover (Control panel right cover) ...................................................... 4-3
4.1.6 Front top cover (Control panel top cover) .......................................................... 4-3
4.1.7 Front lower cover (Control panel lower cover) ................................................... 4-4
4.1.8 Front left cover (Control panel left cover) .......................................................... 4-4
4.1.9 Top front cover................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.10 Top left cover ..................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.11 Left rear cover.................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.12 Top rear left cover.............................................................................................. 4-6
4.1.13 Receiving tray .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.14 Left middle cover ............................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.15 Left top cover ..................................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.16 Left lower cover ................................................................................................. 4-8
4.1.17 Bypass tray unit (Removing tray arm) ............................................................... 4-8
4.1.18 Duplexing unit front cover .................................................................................. 4-9
4.1.19 Duplexing unit rear cover ................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.20 Paper feed cover ............................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.21 Right rear cover ............................................................................................... 4-10
4.1.22 Rear cover ....................................................................................................... 4-10
4.1.23 Top rear cover ................................................................................................. 4-11
4.1.24 Left corner cover.............................................................................................. 4-11
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A © 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
CONTENTS
2
4.1.25 Right corner cover ........................................................................................... 4-11
4.2 Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.2.1 Control panel unit ............................................................................................ 4-12
4.2.2 Hinge cover...................................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.3 Signal harness ................................................................................................. 4-15
4.2.4 KEY board/button ............................................................................................ 4-16
4.2.5 DSP board ....................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3 Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.1 Original glass ................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.2 Lens cover ....................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.3 Automatic original detection sensor-1, -2 (S1/S2) ........................................... 4-21
4.3.4 Lens unit/CCD driving PC board (CCD) .......................................................... 4-21
4.3.5 Carriage home position sensor (S3) ................................................................ 4-24
4.3.6 Exposure lamp (EXP) ...................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.7 Scan motor (M1) .............................................................................................. 4-26
4.3.8 Platen sensor (S4/S5)...................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.9 Carriage-1........................................................................................................ 4-29
4.3.10 Carriage wire, carriage-2 ................................................................................. 4-31
4.3.11 Scanner damp heater (DH1)............................................................................ 4-35
4.3.12 Scanner damp heater thermostat (THMO1) .................................................... 4-36
4.4 Laser Optical Unit............................................................................................................ 4-37
4.4.1 Laser optical unit.............................................................................................. 4-37
4.4.2 Laser optical unit cooling fan (front) (F22) ....................................................... 4-41
4.4.3 Laser optical unit cooling fan (rear) (F23) ........................................................ 4-43
4.4.4 Shutter ............................................................................................................. 4-44
4.4.5 Shutter motor (M38)......................................................................................... 4-45
4.4.6 Shutter sensor (home position) (S24) .............................................................. 4-45
4.4.7 Shutter sensor (end position) (S25) ................................................................. 4-46
4.5 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 4-47
4.5.1 Bypass feed tray .............................................................................................. 4-47
4.5.2 Bypass feed unit .............................................................................................. 4-47
4.5.3 Bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8)....................................................................... 4-48
4.5.4 Bypass paper sensor (S71) ............................................................................. 4-49
4.5.5 Bypass pickup roller......................................................................................... 4-50
4.5.6 Bypass upper unit ............................................................................................ 4-51
4.5.7 Bypass feed roller ............................................................................................ 4-54
4.5.8 Bypass transport roller ..................................................................................... 4-55
4.5.9 Bypass motor (M12) ........................................................................................ 4-55
4.5.10 Bypass separation roller .................................................................................. 4-57
4.5.11 Bypass feed sensor (S72) ............................................................................... 4-59
4.5.12 Bypass paper size detection sensor (S70) ...................................................... 4-59
4.5.13 Drawer feeding unit.......................................................................................... 4-61
4.5.14 Feed roller........................................................................................................ 4-62
4.5.15 Pickup roller ..................................................................................................... 4-63
4.5.16 Separation roller .............................................................................................. 4-63
4.5.17 Transport roller ................................................................................................ 4-64
4.5.18 Drawer detection sensor (S73/S81/S89/S97) .................................................. 4-67
4.5.19 Drawer feed sensor (S78/S86/S94/S102) ....................................................... 4-67
4.5.20 Drawer transport sensor (S77/S85/S93/S101) ................................................ 4-68
4.5.21 Drawer empty sensor (S75/S83/S91/S99)....................................................... 4-69
4.5.22 Drawer tray-up sensor (S76/S84/S92/S100) ................................................... 4-70
4.5.23 Drawer bottom sensor (S74/S82/S90/S98) ..................................................... 4-70
4.5.24 Registration roller (Rubber) ............................................................................. 4-70
4.5.25 Registration guide ............................................................................................ 4-72
4.5.26 Registration sensor (S52) ................................................................................ 4-73
4.5.27 Registration roller (Metal) ................................................................................ 4-74
4.5.28 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor (S51) ................................. 4-74
4.5.29 Feed cover sensor (S114) ............................................................................... 4-75
2.1 Specifications
2.1.1 General
Type Console
Original glass Fixed
Copy process Indirect electrophotographic process
Developing system 2-component magnetic brush developing (Self-refreshing development)
Fixing method Belt fusing system with an external IH
Photosensor type OPC
Original scanning sensor Linear CCD sensor
Scanning light source LED
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi × 600 dpi
Writing 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (smoothing)
Gradation 256
Paper feeding 4 drawers + Bypass feeding + LCF (optional)
2 drawers + Bypass feeding + Tandem LCF + LCF (optional)
Paper Drawers Stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 540 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
supply
Bypass feeding Stack height 13 mm, equivalent to 120 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
LCF (optional) Stack height 285 mm, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
Tandem LCF Stack height 270 mm, equivalent to 2320 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
Weight Approx. 195 kg (429.9 lb.) (equipment including developer and drum)
[ 1 ] Copy specifications
2.1.4 Scan
2.1.5 e-Filing
DVD 1 pc.
Client Utilities / User Documentation DVD
* Machine version
NAD: North America, Brazil ARD: Argentina
MJD: Europe CND: China
AUD: Australia TWD: Taiwan
ASD: Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America
Notes:
Check that the above accessories are correctly co-packed at the time of unpacking.
Note:
GN-4020/C KK-2560
Saddle Stitch Ten Key
Card Reader Holder GR-1260/C
Finisher
GR-1290/C
MJ-1112/C
FAX Unit
Harness kit GD-1370NA/EU/C
6106N/E/F/S/E-C).
GQ-1280
System List
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
2nd Line for FAX Unit
Staple Cartridge Side Exit Tray GD-1370NA/EU/C
STAPLE-2400 KA-6551-ET/ETC
Accessory Tray
GR-1250/C
Staple Cartridge
(Saddle stitch)
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
STAPLE-3100
2 - 12
Fig. 2-1
Hole Punch Unit
MJ-6106N/E/F/S/E-C
HDD Large Capacity
GE-1230 Feeder (LCF)
MP-2502A/L/A-C
The finisher (MJ-1111/C or MJ-1112/C) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-
Model Option
MP-2502A/L/A-C Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
KK-5008/C Operator's manual pocket 2
KA-6551-ET/ETC Side Exit Tray
KK-2560 Accessible Arm
KN-1103 Finisher Guide Rail
MJ-1111/C Finisher
MJ-1112/C Saddle Stitch Finisher
MJ-6106N/E/F/S/E-C Hole Punch Unit (for MJ-1111/1112)
STAPLE-2400 Staple Cartridge (for MJ-1111/1112)
STAPLE-3100 Staple Cartridge (MJ-1112 saddle stitch)
GD-1370NA/EU/C Fax Unit / 2nd Line for FAX Unit
GR-1250/C Accessory Tray
GR-1260/C Ten Key
GR-1290/C Card Reader Holder
GN-4020/C Wireless LAN / Bluetooth Module
GQ-1280 Harness Kit
GE-1230 HDD (FIPS Hard Disk)
GS-1010 Meta Scan Enabler
GS-1020 External Interface Enabler
GP-1080 IPSec Enabler
GP-1070 Data Overwrite Enabler
GS-1007 Unicode Font Enabler
GS-1080 OCR Enabler (1 licence)
GS-1085 OCR Enabler (5 licences)
GS-1090 Multi Station Print Enabler (1 licence)
GS-1095 Multi Station Print Enabler (5 licences)
Drum OD-FC556
Toner cartridge PS-ZT5508U(1) (for North America, Central and South America)
PS-ZT5508E(1) (for Europe)
PS-ZT5508P(1) (for Asia and Australia)
PS-ZT5508C(1) (for China)
PS-ZT5508T(1) (for Taiwan)
Waste toner box PS-TBFC55 (expect for Europe and China)
PS-TBFC55E (for Europe)
PS-TBFC55C (for China)
[1]
[3]
[10] [4]
[5]
[11]
[6]
[12] [7]
[13]
[14] [8]
[15]
[9]
Fig. 3-1
MD4
M2
M1
M5
M4 M3
M15
M48
M7
M8
M6
M19
M13
M27
M29
M39
M12
M30 M38
M34
M40
M33
M42
M41
M43
M44
M46 M47
M45
Fig. 3-2
SD2
SD3 SD1
SD9
SWD2
SD16
SWD1
SD8 SD7
SD6
SD12 SD4
SD11 SD5
SD10 SD13 SD14 SD15
Fig. 3-3
FD1 MD5
MD1
MD3
MD4
CLD
MD2
Fig. 3-4
CCDD LEDD
Fig. 3-5
S1
S4
S5 CCD
S3
KEY
EXP
DSP
TCP
Fig. 3-6
M4
M3
M5
M2 S57
DRV
3
F6
S55
SW5
S61
S60
SOL1
S63
S56
SOL2
Fig. 3-7
THM6
M6
F21
S48
THMO4
Fig. 3-8
F8
IH-COIL
Fig. 3-9
M27
M29
M30
Fig. 3-10
S30
S26
S12
Fig. 3-11
M23
M19
F17
V0S
Fig. 3-12
M13
Fig. 3-13
M39
S47
SOL3
S52
S21
Fig. 3-14
F23
LDR-K
F22
S25
S24
M38
SNS
Fig. 3-15
S8
M15
S42
M33
S38
S14
S13
S16
Fig. 3-16
S64
F11
SW7
M7
M8
ADU
SW2
LED
SW4
S66
S67
Fig. 3-17
SW8
SW9
SW3
SW1
S114
Fig. 3-18
S71
SOL8
M12
S70
S72
Fig. 3-19
S74
M43
M40
M42
M41
CLT4
CLT5
CLT6
CLT7
S80 S79
S82
S88 S87
S90
S98
S96 S95 M45
M44
S104 S103
Fig. 3-20
S73
S75
S76
S81
S83
S84
S89
S77 S91
S78 S92
S85
S97
S86
S99
S93 S100
S94
S101
S102
Fig. 3-21
S108
S111
M47
SOL9
S106 M46
S112 SOL11
S107
S110
S109
SOL10
S113
Fig. 3-22
DSDF-I/F
LGC
PFC
DAMP
FIL-AC
HDD
F27
Fig. 3-23
HVT
PS
F37
Fig. 3-24
F32
F2
F1
F34
F33
F35
F36
F25
F24
F14
Fig. 3-25
THMO1
Fig. 3-26
3.3.1 Motors
MD3 DSDF registration motor Driving the original registration roller Fig. 3-4 86-4
MD4 DSDF read motor Driving the pre-read roller-1, post-read Fig. 3-4 90-5
roller-1, pre-read roller-2 and post-read
roller-2
MD5 DSDF exit motor Driving the original exit motor and Fig. 3-4 90-5
rotating the shading sheet
3.3.2 Fans
F1 Bridge unit heat exhausting fan Exhausting heat from the bridge unit, Fig. 3-25 49-6
and cooling down the bridge unit
transport motor
F2 Fuser unit heat exhausting fan Exhausting heat from the upper side of Fig. 3-25 49-6
the fuser unit, preventing from water
leaking, and exhausting heat from the
toner cartridge area
F6 BRIDGE-FAN-MOT Cooling down the bridge unit and Fig. 3-7 49-6
Bridge unit cooling fan scanner unit, and avoiding exposure to
water
F8 IH-FAN-MOT-1 Cooling down the IH board Fig. 3-9 38-29
IH board cooling fan (exhaust)
F9 IH-FAN-MOT-2 Cooling down the IH board Fig. 3-9 38-33
IH board cooling fan (suction)
F11 ADU-FAN-MOT Cooling down the reversed paper Fig. 3-17 18-26
Reversed paper cooling fan
F14 EPU-FAN-MOT Cooling down the developer unit (EPU) Fig. 3-25 49-6
EPU cooling fan
F17 EPU-FAN-MOT Stirring the ozone of the main charger Fig. 3-12 59-2
Mixing ozone fan unit
F21 TNR-CTRG-FAN-MOT Insulating and cooling down the toner Fig. 3-8 49-35
Fuser insulation fan cartridge
F22 LSU-FAN-MOT-F Cooling down the laser optical unit Fig. 3-15 48-8
Laser optical unit cooling fan (Front)
F23 LSU-FAN-MOT-R Cooling down the laser optical unit, Fig. 3-15 49-13
Laser optical unit cooling fan (Rear) transport motor and feed motor
3.3.3 Sensors
3.3.4 Switches
SW1 MAIN-SW Turning the main power of the Fig. 3-18 44-21
Main power switch equipment ON/OFF
SW2 Interlock switch Supplying or shutting down the AC Fig. 3-17 44-18
power to the switching regulator (Cover
interlock system voltage generation
circuit) by opening/closing the front
cover or duplexing unit
(Cover/unit open: Shutdown)
SW3 TNR-MOT-SW Supplying or shutting down the power Fig. 3-18 44-5
Toner motor interlock switch to the toner motor by opening/closing
the front cover
(Cover open: Shutdown)
SW4 IH interlock switch Supplying or shutting down the IH Fig. 3-17 46-6
power by opening/closing the duplexing
unit
(Unit open: Shutdown)
SW5 REV-PATH-OPEN-SW Switching the opening/closing of the Fig. 3-7 37-13
Reverse path cover switch reverse path cover
SW7 ADU-SET-SW Detecting the opening/closing of the Fig. 3-17 18-40
Duplexing unit interlock switch / automatic duplexing unit cover
Duplexing unit cover opening/closing (supplying or shutting down the 24V of
detection switch the automatic duplexing unit)
SW8 REV-PATH-COV-SW Detecting the connection of the bridge Fig. 3-18 44-4
Bridge unit connecting detection unit
switch
SW9 FRONT-COV-SW Detecting the opening/closing of the Fig. 3-18 44-4
Front cover opening/closing detection front cover
switch
CLT4 CST3-TR-CLT Driving the transport roller of the 3rd Fig. 3-20 9-42
3rd drawer transport clutch drawer or the tandem LCF
CLT5 CST3-FEED-CLT Driving the separation roller, feed roller Fig. 3-20 9-42
3rd drawer feed clutch and pickup roller of the 3rd drawer or
the tandem LCF
CLT6 CST4-TR-CLT Driving the transport roller of the 4th Fig. 3-20 9-42
4th drawer transport clutch drawer
CLT7 CST4-FEED-CLT Driving the separation roller, feed roller Fig. 3-20 9-42
4th drawer feed clutch and pickup roller of the 4th drawer
3.3.6 Solenoids
3.3.7 PC boards
3.3.10 Transformer
3.3.11 Others
TCP TCP Displaying and entering various kinds Fig. 3-6 3-1
Touch panel of information
HDD HDD Saving program data and image data Fig. 3-23 68-19
Hard disk
PS PS-ACC Generating DC voltage and supplying it Fig. 3-24 70-1
Switching regulator to each section of the equipment
2
8
Original exposure
Fusing
LED lamp Paper exit
IH coil
3
Data reading (scanning)
6 1st transfer 3
CCD
7
2nd transfer
Image processing
Toner
Carrier
5
Photocon-
Black development ductive drum 9
Magnetic roller bias Cleaning
Fig. 3-27
(1) Charging: Places a negative charge on the (6) 1st transfer: Transfers the visible image
surface of the photoconductive drum. (toner) on photoconductive drum to the
transfer belt.
(2) Original exposure: Converts images on the (7) 2nd transfer: Transfers the visible image
original into optical signals. (toner) on the transfer belt to paper.
(3) Data reading: The optical image signals are (8) Fusing: Fuses the toner image to the paper
read into CCD and converted into electrical by applying heat and pressure.
signals.
(4) Data writing: The electrical image signals (9) Blade cleaning: While scraping off the
are changed to light signals (by laser residual toner from the drum by the blade.
emission) which expose the surface of the
photoconductive drum.
(5) Development: Negatively-charged toner is (10) (–) Discharging: Eliminates the residual (–)
made to adhere to the photoconductive charge from the surface of the
drum, producing a visible image. photoconductive drum.
[ 1 ] Warming-up
1. Initialization
Power ON
IH coils (IH-COIL) ON
The set number “1”, reproduction ratio “100%” and “Wait Warming Up” are displayed.
Fan motors ON
Initialization of laser optical system 3
- The polygonal motor (M34) rotates at high speed.
Initialization of feeding system
- Each drawer tray goes up.
- Tandem LCF tray goes up.
The pre-running operation is stopped after five seconds.
Initialization of process unit system (process unit related section)
- The transfer belt moves to the releasing position.
- The needle electrode cleaner moves to the home position.
Cleaning of transfer belt*1
- The drum motor (M27) is turned ON.
- The transfer belt motor (M13) is turned ON.
- (Performs image quality control.)*1
Initialization of scanning system
- The carriage moves to the home position.
- The carriage moves to the peak detection position.
- The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned ON.
- Peak detection (the white color is detected by the shading correction plate)
- The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned OFF.
The polygonal motor (M34) rotates at low speed.
“READY (WARMING UP)” is displayed.
2. Pre-running operation
The pre-running operation is started at the corresponding starting timing.
The fuser motor (M6) is turned ON.
- Fuser roller rotation.
3. When the temperature of the fuser belt becomes sufficient for fusing,
The IH coil (IH-COIL) is turned OFF.
“READY” is displayed.
The polygonal motor (M34) rotates at high speed for 30 seconds.
*1: Image quality control and color registration control should be performed only at a change of
environment or at periodical maintenance.
4. Completion of scanning
The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned OFF.
The Scan motor (M1) is turned OFF.
The Registration motor (M39) is turned OFF (after the trailing edge of the paper passed the
registration roller).
“READY (PRINTING)” is displayed.
5. Printing operation
The drum motor (M27), transfer belt motor (M13), 2nd transfer motor (M9) and discharge LED
(ERS) ON.
The 2nd transfer bias is turned ON.
The main charger bias is turned ON.
The K developer bias (DC), developer unit mixer motor (M29) and developer unit motor (M30)
are turned ON.
The K developer bias (AC) is turned ON.
Laser emission (image)
The 1st transfer bias is turned ON.
- 1st transfer of image (The image is transferred to the transfer belt.)
The 1st transfer bias is turned OFF.
2nd transfer of image (The image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper.)
The main charger is turned OFF.
The developer unit mixer motor (M29), developer unit motor (M30) and developer bias are turned
OFF.
The Drum motor (M27), transfer belt motor (M13) and discharge LED (ERS) OFF.
The 2nd transfer bias is turned OFF.
3. Bypass feeding
The fans rotate at high speed.
The bypass motor (M12) is turned ON.
- The bypass pickup roller is lowered.
The bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8) is turned ON.
- The bypass pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller start to rotate.
Aligning operation
Paper reaches the registration roller.
After a certain period of time, the bypass motor (M12) is turned OFF.
4. Hereafter, operations (3) through (6) of “[ 3 ]Drawer feed copying (1st drawer paper feeding)” are
repeated.
[ 5 ] Interruption copying
1. Press the [INTERRUPT] button
LED “INTERRUPT” is turned ON.
Copying operation in progress is temporarily stopped, and the carriages-1 and -2 return to their
appropriate positions.
“Job interrupted job 1 saved” is displayed.
Automatic density and reproduction ratio 100% are set. The set number remains the same.
[ 1 ] Types of abnormality
1. Abnormalities cleared without turning OFF the door switch
(A) Add paper
(B) Paper misfeed in bypass
(C) No toner in the cartridge
3. Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main power switch
(F) Call for service
[ 2 ] Description of abnormality
• [In case of the equipment drawer or PFP drawer] (When no drawer is installed)
Drawer not detected
Drawer is not installed:
Drawer is installed but there is no paper in it:
No paper
A signal sent to the control circuit
Drawer area of the control panel blinks
(When the drawer is selected)
[START] button is disabled.
[In case of the equipment, tandem LCF] (When a drawer is installed)
Based on the combination of the tray-up motor (M44, M45) movement and the status of the tray-up
sensor and empty sensor, The CPU detects the presence of paper.
• The empty sensor is turned OFF during copying in spite of the tray-up sensor being ON
It is judged that there is no paper.
The drawer area of the control panel blinks.
(When the drawer is selected)
The copying operation is stopped.
• [In case of the equipment drawer or PFP drawer] (When no drawer is installed)
• During bypass feeding
The bypass motor (M12) is turned ON
The registration sensor (S52) is turned ON
* The registration sensor (S52) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time (E120).
Bypass misfeeding
The bypass misfeed symbol is displayed.
The copying operation is disabled.
Solution: The bypass sensor (S71) is turned OFF when you remove the paper from the bypass
tray.
• The exit sensor (S61, S63) detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper.
The registration motor (M39) is turned ON
ON
Regulation time Registration motor
Exit sensor (S61, S63) turned ON ON
If the exit sensor (S61, S63) is not turned ON Exit sensor 3
after a regulation time,
Timer
Paper jam (E010) The copying operation is 0 Regulation time
stopped.
Paper jam (E010)
Fig. 3-28
• The exit sensor (S61, S63) detects jamming of the trailing edge of the paper.
The registration motor (M39) is turned OFF Registration motor
OFF
Regulation time.
The exit sensor (S61, S63) turned OFF Exit sensor
If the exit sensor (S61, S63) is not turned OFF ON
a regulation time,
Timer
Paper jam (E020) The copying operation is Regulation time
stopped.
• The 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor (S51) detects jamming of the paper.
The registration motor (M39) is turned ON
The transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor (S47) is turned ON
If the 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor (S51) is not turned ON in a fixed period of
time,
Paper jam (E011) The copying operation is stopped.
• The waste toner box full detection sensor (S14) is turned ON during printing
Printing is stopped after the paper being printed has exited
Solution: Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the waste toner box cover.
It is recommended to shut down the equipment while pressing the [ACCESS] button and the [ON/OFF] 3
button simultaneously before maintenance. However, warming-up takes longer when the equipment
boots up next time since no hibernation is executed. The equipment therefore boots up in the
initialization status. “Checking” is displayed on the LCD screen when the equipment boots up normally
(without hibernation), and “Checking” is not displayed when hibernation is executed.
If hibernation is not performed when the power is turned OFF or the equipment boots up immediately
after the settings, warming-up takes longer. It differs depending on the usage conditions; warming-up
will take approx. 30 to 150 sec, though it takes approx. 20 sec. if hibernation is performed (normal
situation).
The following are the conditions which necessitate a longer warming-up time.
• Rebooting from TopAccess
• First booting after power interruption
• First booting after a self-diagnosis code is changed in the Service UI
• First booting after the power is turned OFF with the main power switch during the super sleep mode
• Installing options or finishers
• First booting after an option or a finisher is removed
• During toner supply
• Operating while “READY (WARMING UP)” is still on the control panel
• First booting after the [ACCESS] and [ON/OFF] buttons are pressed and held until the power is shut
down
• Shutting down during network initialization
• First booting after the power is turned OFF in a procedure other than the correct one described in
the Quick Start Guide
Fig. 3-30
[12]
[10] [9] [8]
Fig. 3-31
Scanner
Original glass Original glass
ADF original glass
Carriage-1 Exposure lamp (EXP)
Reflector
Mirror-1
Carriage-2 Mirror-2
Mirror-3
Lens unit Lens
CCD driving PC board (CCD)
Automatic original
detection sensor
(S1, S2)
Driving section Scan motor (M1) • 2-phase stepping motor
• Driving the carriage-1 and carriage-
2
Other Carriage home position sensor (S3)
Platen sensor-1 (S4)
Platen sensor-2 (S5)
2. Carriage-1
Carriage-1 consists of the exposure lamp (EXP), reflector, mirror-1, etc. It is driven by the scan
motor (M1) and scans an original on the glass.
[4] [5]
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
[3]
[3]
Fig. 3-32
- Reflector
This is a plate to efficiently direct the light from the exposure lamp (EXP) to the surface of the
original on the glass.
- Mirror-1
This mirror directs the light reflected from the original to the mirror-2 described later.
[1]
[2]
Fig. 3-33
[1] Mirror-2
[2] Mirror-3
4. Lens unit
The light reflected from the mirror-3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is
fixed in a position.
[1]
Fig. 3-34
[1] Lens
[2] CCD board
[ 1 ] Scanning operation
[2]
[1]
[3]
3
[7]
[6]
[5] [4]
Fig. 3-35
• Carriage speed
The Carriage speed of the original placed on the original glass in the color mode is the same as
that in the black mode.
S2
S1
A B C
S4
S5
Fig. 3-36
C: DSDF closed - Detected by the platen sensors-1 & -2 (S4 & S5)
This status is detected by the platen sensors (S4 and S5). The exposure lamp of
the scanner emits light for a short time and the sensors detect the length of the original
in the primary scanning direction again.
Tip: When the DSDF is fully closed or closed by 25 degrees or less, the exposure lamp
emits light as follows.
Light emitted -> OFF -> light emitted -> OFF -> carriage moved
If the connectors are connected to the platen sensors (S4 and S5) in reverse, the
exposure lamp emits light as follows.
Light emitted -> OFF -> carriage moved -> light emitted
When the following phenomena have occurred, the platen sensor (S4) may be damaged.
In such a case, check the sensors and harnesses.
• The exposure lamp does not emit light even when the platen cover is opened by 25 degrees.
• The detected paper size of the original is not correct.
Size 1
S2
Size 2 A5-R
Size 3 B5-R
Size 4 16K-R
Size 5 A5 A4-R
Size 6 B5 B4
Size 7 16K 8K
Size 8 A4 A3
Fig. 3-37
S2
S1
Size 1 ST-R
Size 2 ST LT-R LG
Size 3 LT LD
Fig. 3-38
[1]
[7]
[2] [6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Fig. 3-39
[1] Shutter
[2] Shutter sensor (end position)
[3] Shutter sensor (home position)
[4] Shutter motor
[5] Laser optical unit
[6] Slit glass
[7] Polygonal motor
The following cautionary label for the laser is attached to the frame which you can see when
opening the front lower cover.
Fig. 3-40
Cautions:
- Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION.
LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the
equipment.
Fig. 3-41
[11]
[8]
[10]
[1]
[13]
[3]
[9] [2]
[12]
Fig. 3-42
The composition of the 1st and the 2nd drawers of the Tandem LCF model is the same as that of the 4-
drawer model.
The 3rd and the 4th drawers are not installed but instead the Tandem LCF is installed.
T10
T15 T19 T4
T6 T1 T8
T11 T13 T16 T20
T7 T9
T3
T5
T2
Feeding system
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feeding 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer pickup roller
unit 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feed roller
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer separation roller
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer transfer roller
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feed sensor S78/S86/S94/S102 3
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer transport sensor S77/S85/S93/S101
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer tray-up sensor S76/S84/S92/S100
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer empty sensor S75/S83/S91/S99
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer detection sensor S73/S81/S89/S97
Bypass feeding unit Bypass pickup roller
Bypass feed roller
Bypass separation roller
Bypass paper roller S71
Bypass feed sensor S72
Bypass transport sensor SOL8
Bypass pickup solenoid S70
Bypass motor M12
Drive section, other 3rd / 4th drawer transport clutch CLT4/CLT6
3rd / 4th drawer feed clutch CLT5/CLT7
Transport motor-1/Transport motor-2 M40/M41
1st/2nd drawer feed motor M42
3rd/4th drawer/LCF feed motor M43
Registration motor M39
Registration roller
Registration sensor S52
Transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor S47
1st/2nd drawer tray-up motor / 3rd/4th M44/M45
drawer/LCF tray-up motor
Tandem LCF Tandem LCF pickup roller
Tandem LCF feed roller
Tandem LCF separation roller
Tandem LCF transport roller
Tandem LCF feed sensor S94
Tandem LCF transport sensor S93
T-LCF pickup solenoid SOL9
T-LCF end fence motor M47
T-LCF tray-up motor M46
5. Registration roller
Paper transported from the transport roller is pushed against the registration roller which aligns the
leading edge of the paper.
Then, the registration rollers rotate to transport the paper to the transfer unit.
17.1st/2nd drawer tray-up motor / 3rd/4th drawer/LCF tray-up motor (M44, M45)
When this motor rotates normally, the tray in the 1st drawer moves up, and when the motor rotates
reversely, the tray in the 2nd drawer moves up.
21.Drawer paper width detection sensor / Drawer paper length detection sensor (S79/S80/S87/S88/
S95/S96/S103/S104).
These sensors detect the size of the paper placed in each drawer.
Paper sizes can be detected with the combination of switch signals that are sent by the movement
of the end and side guides in each drawer.
[ 1 ] Drive of rollers
The drive of each motor in the paper feeding area activates the paper transfer roller as follows.
Transport motor-1 (M40) 1st drawer transport ro
Transport motor-2( M41) 2nd drawer transport
1st/2nd drawer feed motor (M42) 1st drawer feed roller
Normal rotation
1st drawer pickup rolle
2nd drawer feed roller
Reverse rotation
2nd drawer pickup rol
3rd/4th drawer/LCF feed motor 3rd drawer transport clutch(CLT4) 3rd drawer transport r
(M43) 4th drawer transport r
4th drawer transport clutch(CLT6)
3rd drawer feed roller
3rd drawer feed clutch(CLT5)
3rd drawer pickup roll
4th drawer feed clutch(CLT7) 4th drawer feed roller
4th drawer pickup rolle
Bypass pickup motor Bypass feed roller
(M12)
Bypass pickup roller
Registration motor (M39) Registration roller
1st/2nd drawer tray-up motor (M44) Trays in 1st/2nd drawer
3rd/4th drawer/LCF tray-up motor (M45) Trays in 3rd/4th drawer
Transport motor-2(M41)
1st/2nd drawer tr
3rd drawer transport clutch
(M44)
(CLT4)
3rd drawer feed clutch(CLT5)
3rd/4th drawer/LCF feed m
4th drawer transport clutch
(CLT6) Feed/transport unit
Rear view
Fig. 3-44
Pickup arm
Bypass separation roller
Bypass transport roller
Bypass motor(M12)
Pickup roller
Lever
A Insertion direction
Fig. 3-46
End guide
[Example]
The positions of the guides and the pusher in cases of A3 and A4-R are shown below as examples.
A3 A4-R
End guide
Pusher
Side guide
2. If the drawer is not completely inserted when the equipment is turned ON, the tray for that drawer is
not raised. When the drawer is inserted completely, the tray is raised and checks the availability of
the paper.
3. If either of the sensors on the transport path is ON (means there is paper on the transport path)
when the equipment is turned ON, it is determined that a paper jam has occurred and no operation
is enabled until the paper is removed.
2. When a drawer is inserted or removed at ready status, the tray is raised again to check the
availability of paper.
Drum
Fig. 3-49
[13] [2]
[12] [3] 3
[4]
[11] [5]
[10]
1. Drum
Drum is made of a cylindrical aluminum base coated with a thin film of organic photosensitive
(photoconductive) substance. Photoconductive object becomes insulative (high electrical
resistance) when it is not exposed to lights and becomes conductive (low electrical resistance) when
it is exposed to lights. This object is called photoconductor.
3. Main charger
The main charger in this equipment consists of insulated terminals having a U-shaped section and a
needle electrode attached between them. When a high voltage is applied to the needle electrode,
the air around it is charged (ionized). The ionized air then flows into the drum causing it to be
charged. This phenomenon is called “corona discharge”. At the same time, a control bias is applied
to the main charger grid to control the charging amount. In a dark place, negative charge is evenly
applied onto the drum surface by the corona discharge and this grid. In addition, a cleaner is
installed to clean up the blot attached on the needle electrode.
- Needle electrode
The needle electrode has aligned needles and their points perform the corona discharge.
These points (electrodes) discharge toward the drum in one direction to realize the more
efficient discharging comparing to the charger wire which discharges in a radial direction.
Therefore, the needle electrode enables to reduce the ozone amount.
7. Ozone filter
Ozone produced by corona discharge of the main charger is exhausted through this filter.
The catalyzer of the ozone filter degrades the ozone.
13.Developer material
The developer material consists of the carrier and toner. Normally developer material does not need
to be replaced periodically. However, replacement may be needed depending on the use condition.
14.Mixer
The carrier and toner are frictionized each other when the developer material is stirred. Then the
carrier is positively charged (+) and the toner is negatively charged (–), and the toner is adhered by
the electrostatic force.
16.Doctor blade
The doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material from the developer sleeve so that
the magnetic brush of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly.
26.Toner filter
This collects toner scattered out of the developer unit (developer sleeve).
[ 1-2 ] Configuration
The configuration of this control circuit is shown below.
• High-voltage transformer:
Generates and supplies the bias voltage of the main charger grid.
These data written in the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG) enable the functions below, and accordingly 3
this equipment operates as shown below.
Data reading is performed every time when the power is turned ON, the front cover is closed, a job is
finished and the equipment has recovered from the sleep mode.
[ 2 ] Functions
• Cartridge detecting function
This function checks whether the toner cartridge is inserted correctly or not, and whether the
recommended toner cartridge is used or not.
• Toner remaining check function
This function notifies the user of the near-empty status of toner. Normally, the message (Toner is
low) is displayed when the toner is running out, and (Toner empty) when the toner cartridge is
empty.
• Toner remaining check notification function
Upon detecting the near-empty status of toner, this function automatically notifies your service
representative.
• Image optimization function
This function controls the quality of images to be optimal according to the characteristics of the toner
used.
• Toner remaining display function
This function displays the remaining toner amount from 0% to 100%.
[ 3 ] Operations
A sign indicating that the toner cartridge is nearly empty appears in the following cases:
• The counter value for the toner cartridge rotation time has exceeded the threshold previously written
in the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG). (Related code: FS-08-5155)
• The remaining amount of toner is equal to or less than the set amount (percentage or number of
sheets). (Related code: FS-08-5155, FS-08-5810, FS-08-5811)
When a used cartridge refilled with new toner is used, a sign indicating that the toner cartridge is empty
appears because information for determining the empty status is already written in the toner cartridge
PC board (CTRG).
When a non-recommended toner cartridge is used, "Toner not recognized" appears on the control
panel, and then the equipment may stop normal operations. The toner remaining display function, the
toner remaining check function, the automatic remote supply order to Toshiba sales representatives
and the image optimization function may also be disabled.
The self-diagnosis codes to adjust the timing for displaying the toner near-empty status are as follows.
• Fine adjustment of threshold value for displaying the toner remaining amount / toner near-empty
(FS-08-5156)
Performs fine adjustment of the threshold value for displaying the toner remaining amount and toner
near-empty.
Display threshold value = Default threshold value x setting value/100 (Unit: %)
FS-08-5155=1 (Default)
Toner remaining amount display (%)
FS-08-5155=0
FS-08-5155=2
100
50
0
Approx 2,000 sheet Number of print sheets
Toner empty
Toner near empty
Fig. 3-51
Notes:
• Do not perform the change operations 1 (Fine adjustment of the toner remaining amount
display) and 2 (Toner near-empty setting change) simultaneously. Otherwise, the desired
results may not be obtained. If the change is required by the combination of the operations 1
(Fine adjustment of the toner remaining amount display) and 2 (Toner near-empty setting
change), only perform either of them first. Then change the setting for another one while
checking the results.
• The values of the toner remaining amount and the number of print sheets are the reference.
They will vary depending on the printed images and usage conditions.
[2] [9]
[7] [4] [5] [3] [6] [1] [10]
Drum
[8]
Fig. 3-52
Transfer belt
Slider
Guide roller
(Detection roller)
Gear Rib
Operation flow
1. The transfer belt is inclined to the front or rear side.
2. The rib of the inclined belt contacts with either of the guide rollers and thus makes the gears rotate.
3. The gears rotate and thus their lead screws make the slider shift forward or backward.
4. The steering roller is inclined with the rack and pinion mechanism.
5. The inclined steering roller moves the inclined transfer belt to the original position.
6. The steering roller stops the leaning at a position in which the rib of the belt no longer contacts with
the guide roller.
Notes:
• The tolerance for the cutting angle of the self-steering mechanism is normally +/- 2 degrees.
• If the cutting angle does not fall within the acceptable range, check and correct the following:
1. Is the equipment installed on a flat surface? Is the equipment installed slantwise?
2. Is the transfer belt unit assembled correctly?
3. Is the transfer belt installed correctly?
In addition, a shutter operated by the Image quality shutter solenoid (SOL3) is equipped on the light
receiving/emitting surfaces to prevent stain to the sensor.
Fig. 3-54
[12]
[2] [3], [4] [7] [13]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[10] [11]
[1]
Fig. 3-55
Fig. 3-56
In the equipment, when "Envelope" is selected from the menu on the LCD panel, the pressure roller
contact/release cams rotate and come to the semi-contact position (envelope position). Then the
pressure for the envelope printing is adjusted.
[4]
[3]
[1] [2]
Fig. 3-57
[ 1-1 ] Configuration
This equipment employs an external IH coil unit for heating the fuser belt. IH coils in the IH coil unit
generate a magnetic field to heat the fuser unit with a high-frequency current carried inside of them.
The temperature of the fuser belt is detected with the center and edge thermistors.
The detected temperature data are sent to the ASIC. Based on the received temperature data, the
ASIC then controls the electricity of the IH coils. When the surface temperature of the fuser belt
exceeds the preset temperature, the forcible power OFF circuit sends a power supply relay OFF signal
as well as an overheating signal to the ASIC, and then shuts OFF power supply over all parts except
the control panel.
If the circuit noted above does not operate due to problems such as thermistor malfunction and
therefore the fuser belt is abnormally heated, the thermostat shuts OFF power supply to the IH coils to
protect the equipment.
Coil output
Main switch
(SW1) 3
Interlock switch
IH coil(IH-COIL) (SW7) (SW9)
Fuser unit N L N L
Relay
Fuser belt
Switching regulator
Edge Center
thermistor thermistor
(PS)
(THM6) (THM5)
IH coil energization permitting signal
N L N L N L
Switching signal of power setting
(SW1)
Rotation Contact/Release
detection sensor detection sensor
(S49) (S48)
Fuse
L
Noise
filter N
Fuse L
Noise
Forcible power-off filter N
ASIC
circuit
FIL board (FIL-IH)
LGC board (LGC) 75ppm/85ppm: NAD,NAC
Fig. 3-58
Tips:
The fuser unit error status counter never has any values other than 0 to 66. If the counter value is
“67” or over, data in EEPROM may possibly have been ruined due to causes such as leakage
from the chargers. In this case, check the bias, high-voltage transformers and needle electrodes
to see if any of them is defective, and also recheck all the data in the EEPROM.
• When the thermistors detect overheating, the engine CPU determines an error code and the fuser
unit error status counter value. After turning OFF each output (from the exposure lamp, control
panel, motors and so on) to protect the fuser unit, the engine CPU shuts OFF power supply to the
main power switch.
The thermistors continue detecting abnormal temperatures even after an error code and a counter
value are determined. Even if the main power switch is turned ON immediately, the switch is
automatically turned OFF unless otherwise the surface temperature of the fuser belt goes lower
than the abnormal temperature detected. In this case, therefore, wait unit the surface temperature of
the fuser belt becomes lower than the abnormal temperature detected, and then turn ON the main
power switch. Then check the counter value while you are waiting for the main power switch to be
automatically turned OFF. After confirming that it is a fuser unit abnormality, correct the subject part
in the unit and clear the counter value to "0" so that the equipment can be started up normally.
Error
Check timing Error code Counter Center Edge judging
timing
Power ON C449 9 Fixed 220°C or above 237°C or above
When pre- C449 22 Fixed 220°C or above 237°C or above On usual 3
running end C445 5 Not fixed Ready temperature -
temperature or above
C446 6 Fixed
or ready
temperature
is detected
During ready C449 23 Fixed 220°C or above 237°C or above On usual
C447 7 Fixed 0°C or below -
C447 63 Fixed - 0°C or below
During C449 25 Fixed 220°C or above 237°C or above On usual
printing C447 24 Fixed 0°C or below -
C447 64 Fixed - 0°C or below
C447 65 Fixed 40°C or below -
C447 66 Fixed - 40°C or below
At energy C449 27 Fixed 220°C or above 237°C or above On usual
saving mode
At paper jam C449 29 Fixed 220°C or above 237°C or above On usual
[6] [4]
[7] [5]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[3]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Fig. 3-59
(Front view)
[13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[14] [15]
(Rear view)
[18] [17] [16]
[19]
[20]
Fig. 3-60
[15]
[2]
[1]
[14]
[3]
[13]
[4]
[12]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[8]
Fig. 3-61
When the duplex printing mode is selected, first the print data of the back side of the original are printed
on the back side of the fed paper, and then the printed paper is transported from the fuser unit to the
bridge unit. At this time transport path switching solenoid (bridge unit/reverse section) (SOL1) is turned
ON in order to lower flapper-1, and transport path switching solenoid (upper exit/lower exit) (SOL2) is
turned OFF in order not to lower flapper-2, so that the paper will be transported to the reverse path
section. When the reverse sensor (S59) of the bridge unit detects the trailing edge of the paper, the
reverse roller is driven to switch back the paper to the duplexing unit via the duplexing bridge unit. Then
the print data of the front side of the original are printed on the front side of the paper that was
transported from the duplexing unit to the registration section. After printing on the both sides of the
paper is completed, the paper is made to exit by the bridge unit and the paper exit unit.
Paper jams on the upper transport path are detected by means of the reverse sensor (S59) of the
bridge unit and the upper paper exit sensor (S61) of the paper exit unit. Paper jams on the lower
transport path are detected by means of the bridge unit path entrance sensor (S55), bridge unit path
exit sensor (S56) and lower paper exit sensor (S63). Paper jams on the reverse path are detected by
means of the reverse path sensor (S57). The reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S58) of
the bridge unit and another reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S60) of the paper exit unit
detect where the jammed paper lies on the reverse path.
1
3
Fig. 3-62
Fig. 3-63
[5]
SD11
[6]
[ 1 ] General Descriptions
Transportation of originals is operated by the DSDF feed motor, DSDF read motor and DSDF exit
motor.
The role for each motor is as below.
Rotational
Motor Type Function
direction
Driving the DSDF pickup roller and the
DSDF feed motor Stepping motor Clockwise
DSDF feed roller
Stepping motor Clockwise Lowering the original tray lift
DSDF separation Performing the reverse operation of the
motor Stepping motor Counterclockwise DSDF separation roller and moving the
original tray lift upward
DSDF registration
Stepping motor Counterclockwise Driving the DSDF registration roller
motor
Driving the pre-read roller-1, post-read
DSDF read motor Stepping motor Counterclockwise roller-1, pre-read roller-2 and post-read
roller-2
Clockwise Rotating the shading sheet
DSDF exit motor Stepping motor
Counterclockwise Driving the original exit roller
[ 2 ] Drive Section
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
CW
Fig. 3-65
When original feeding starts, the DSDF separation motor rotates clockwise to perform the reverse
operation of the original separation roller.
This will prevent multiple feeding of an original.
Moreover, when the DSDF empty sensor is turned ON, the DSDF separation motor rotates 3
counterclockwise, resulting in the original tray lift going up.
When the DSDF empty sensor is turned OFF, the DSDF separation motor rotates counterclockwise,
resulting in the original tray lift lowering.
Transmitting the driving force from the DSDF separation motor to the original tray lift is controlled by the
DSDF tray-up clutch.
[3]
[4]
[2]
CW
[1]
CCW
Fig. 3-66
[1]
[2]
CCW
Fig. 3-67
[5] 3
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
CCW
Fig. 3-68
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
CW
CCW
Fig. 3-69
SD2
3
SD3 SD1
SD8 SD7
Fig. 3-70
It is detected by the brush attached to the rack moving on the original tray width sensor, which is a
board with the different length of the patterns written. This brush is moved as the original width guide is
moved. Signals (TWID0S, TWID1S, TWID2S) are opened and shorted to SG by this movement.
The combination of these short (= low level) and open (= high level) can determine the width of the
original.
The size of the original is determined by the combination of the ON/OFF status of the DSDF tray
original width sensor, DSDF tray original length sensor-1 and -2. Therefore, if the sensors cannot detect
the size of the original properly due to its being folded or bent, an incorrect size may be detected.
Sizes detectable in combination of these open and short of the signals are as follows:
[ 1 ] Description of Operations
1. AC filter
Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking
to the outside.
2. DC output circuits
Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC
voltage is divided into the following two lines.
a. Main power switch line:Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process.
Two kinds of voltage (+5.1 V and +12V) are output when the main power
switch of the equipment is turned ON.
b. Cover switch line: Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process,
being supplied via the cover switch. Voltage (+24VD) is output only when the
main power switch of the equipment is turned ON, and the front cover and the
automatic duplexing unit are closed.
3. Output protection
Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits (a fuse and internal
protection circuit). This is to prevent the defectives (damage or abnormal operation of the secondary
circuit) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvoltage due to a
short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated (except the case the fuse
is blown out), remove the causes such as short-circuit. Turn ON the power again to clear the
overcurrent protection.
- When the Super sleep mode is set to be disabled on the control panel, TopAccess and with the
code FS-08-8543.
- When the Wireless LAN Module, Bluetooth Module, e-BRIDGE ID Gate or Data Overwrite
Enabler is installed, or when the IPsec Enabler is installed and its function is set to be enabled.
- When operation is being performed in the self-diagnosis mode (Disabled until the main power
switch is turned OFF).
The following are output channels for the cover switch line.
AC line
Connector Destination Voltage
CN501/CN502 AC line
CN503 Main power switch
CN506 Fuser unit input
CN504/CN505 Fuser unit output
Fig. 4-1
Fig. 4-2
(4) Remove 1 clip.
Fig. 4-3
Fig. 4-4
Fig. 4-5
Fig. 4-6
Fig. 4-7
Fig. 4-8
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the front top
cover [2].
[2]
Fig. 4-9
Fig. 4-10
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the front lower
cover [2].
Fig. 4-11
[1]
Fig. 4-12
Fig. 4-14
Fig. 4-15
Fig. 4-16
Fig. 4-17
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the receiving
tray [2].
Fig. 4-18
Fig. 4-19
Fig. 4-20
(4) Remove 6 screws and take off the left top
cover [2].
Fig. 4-21
Fig. 4-22
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the left lower
cover [2].
Fig. 4-23
Fig. 4-24
Fig. 4-25
Fig. 4-26
Fig. 4-27
Fig. 4-28
[1]
Fig. 4-29
Notes:
When installing, do not let the harness be
caught.
Fig. 4-30
Fig. 4-31
Fig. 4-32
Fig. 4-35
(11) Release the harness [1] from 3 harness
clamps.
Fig. 4-36
Fig. 4-37
(13) Remove 3 screws and take off the control
panel unit [2] by sliding it toward the rear
side.
Fig. 4-38
Fig. 4-39
Fig. 4-40
Fig. 4-41
Fig. 4-42
Fig. 4-43
Fig. 4-44
Fig. 4-45
Fig. 4-46
Notes:
When disconnecting the flat cable [1],
release the lock by raising the latch and
disconnect it.
Fig. 4-47
Fig. 4-48
Fig. 4-49
Fig. 4-50
Fig. 4-51
Notes:
• When removing the flat cable [4], release
4 latches and remove it.
Fig. 4-52
Fig. 4-53
Fig. 4-54
Fig. 4-55
Fig. 4-56
Fig. 4-57
Fig. 4-58
Fig. 4-59
Notes:
• When removing the flat cable [2], change
the lever position so that the connector is
released, and remove the flat cable by
lifting it up slightly (approx. 7 degrees) as
shown in the right figure.
• When connecting the flat cable [2] to the
connector, insert the flat cable straightly
and lock it securely. Confirm that the tabs
are in the positions shown in the right
figure.
Fig. 4-60
Notes:
• When installing the flat cable [2], do not
push it in strongly.
• When installing the flat cable [2], be
careful not to insert it at an angle.
• Do not apply pressure to or damage the
edge of the flat cable [2].
Fig. 4-61
Fig. 4-62
Fig. 4-63
Fig. 4-64
Fig. 4-65
Fig. 4-66
Fig. 4-67
Notes:
• To move the carriage, manually rotate the
drive pulley.
Fig. 4-68
Fig. 4-69
Fig. 4-70
Fig. 4-71
Fig. 4-72
Fig. 4-73
Fig. 4-74
Fig. 4-75
Fig. 4-76
Fig. 4-77
Notes:
When installing, be careful not to connect
each different connector.
Fig. 4-78
Fig. 4-79
4.3.9 Carriage-1
Fig. 4-80
Notes:
To move the carriage, manually rotate the
drive pulley.
Fig. 4-81
Fig. 4-82
Fig. 4-83
Fig. 4-84
Fig. 4-85
[1]
Fig. 4-86
[1]
Fig. 4-87
[3]
Fig. 4-88
Fig. 4-89
[Rear side]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6]
Fig. 4-91
[1]
No space between turns
[2]
Color: Black
Fig. 4-93
Notes:
1. When attaching the wire holder jig, make
sure that the wire has not shifted or
become loose.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of [3]
the wire holder jig and be passed under
the jig arm [4].
[3]
Fig. 4-94
Fig. 4-95
(4) Remove the scanner damp heater [1].
Fig. 4-96
Fig. 4-97
Fig. 4-98
Fig. 4-100
Notes:
Install the removed harness clamp [3] in the
hole [6] of the frame, so that you can remove
the laser optical unit easily.
Fig. 4-101
Fig. 4-102
(8) Release the flat cables from 2 flat cable
clamps.
Fig. 4-103
(9) Remove 2 screws and then take off the EPU
cooling fan duct [7].
Fig. 4-104
Fig. 4-105
(11) Pull out the EPU together with the transfer
belt.
P. 4-165 "4.7.1 Pulling out of the transfer
belt unit"
(12) Remove 2 screws.
Notes:
When reassembling, make sure the bosses
of the laser optical unit is securely inserted
into the holes [9] of the plate.
Fig. 4-106
Fig. 4-107
Fig. 4-108
Notes:
1. Do not leave fingerprints or stains on the
slit glass of the laser optical unit.
2. Pay close attention not to cause any
impact to the laser optical unit because it
is a precision apparatus.
3. Place the removed laser optical unit so as
not to cause any load for the polygonal B A
motor.
4. Do not disassemble the laser optical unit
in the field because it is precisely
adjusted and very sensitive to dust and
stains.
5. In the case of the laser optical unit, Fig. 4-109
horizontally hold the parts A and B shown
in the figure. Be careful not to apply
pressure to the top of the unit (the cover)
with your hands, etc. because the slit
glass and the polygonal motor are
installed in this section.
6. When the laser optical unit has been
taken off, keep the shutter closed unless
otherwise required.
Fig. 4-110
(4) Remove 1 harness clamp.
Fig. 4-111
(5) Remove 2 screws.
Fig. 4-112
Fig. 4-113
Notes:
When installing the laser optical unit cooling
duct to the equipment, set its harness as
shown in the figure.
Fig. 4-114
(7) Release 4 latches and take off the case [3].
Notes:
When taking off the case, do not pull any
harness which is coming out of the hole in
the case.
Fig. 4-115
Fig. 4-116
Fig. 4-117
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the laser
optical unit cooling duct [3].
Fig. 4-118
Fig. 4-119
4.4.4 Shutter
Fig. 4-120
(3) Remove the shutter [1].
Fig. 4-121
Fig. 4-122
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the shutter
motor [1].
Fig. 4-123
Fig. 4-124
Fig. 4-125
Fig. 4-126
(4) Lift up the hinge [1] slightly and take off the
bypass tray [2].
Notes:
When installing or taking off the bypass tray,
keep it setting up because it is tensed with a
spring.
Fig. 4-127
Fig. 4-128
Fig. 4-129
Fig. 4-130
Fig. 4-131
Fig. 4-132
Fig. 4-133
(3) Release 3 latches and take off the bypass
paper sensor [2].
Fig. 4-134
Fig. 4-135
Fig. 4-136
Fig. 4-137
Fig. 4-138
Fig. 4-139
Fig. 4-140
(4) Remove 1 E-ring [3], 1 belt [4], 1 gear [5] and
1 bushing [6].
Fig. 4-141
Fig. 4-142
Fig. 4-143
Fig. 4-145
Fig. 4-146
Fig. 4-147
Fig. 4-148
Fig. 4-149
(4) Remove 4 screws and a bracket [5].
Fig. 4-150
(5) Remove 2 screws.
Fig. 4-151
Fig. 4-152
Fig. 4-153
(3) Release the harness from 4 harness clamps.
Remove 4 screws and take off the SFB lower
unit [2].
Fig. 4-154
Fig. 4-155
(5) Lift up the shaft [4] and then take off the
bypass separation roller [5].
Fig. 4-156
(6) Remove the washer [6] of the shaft [4].
[6]
[4]
Fig. 4-157
Fig. 4-158
Fig. 4-159
Fig. 4-160
Fig. 4-161
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [3].
Fig. 4-162
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the bypass paper size
detection sensor [4].
Fig. 4-163
Fig. 4-164
[1]
Fig. 4-165
Notes:
• When removing the 1st drawer feeding
[2]
unit, take off the connector cover [2].
Fig. 4-166
Fig. 4-167
Fig. 4-168
Fig. 4-169
Fig. 4-170
Fig. 4-171
(3) Remove 1 clip and take off the separation
roller [2].
Fig. 4-172
Fig. 4-173
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [2].
Remove the paper guide B [3] by sliding it.
Notes:
When installing the paper guide B, fix the
bracket temporarily with 1 screw. Then install
the paper guide B.
Fig. 4-174
(4) Release the harness [4] from 4 harness
clamps. Disconnect 1 connector [5] and
remove 1 screw. Then take off the sensor
cover [6].
Fig. 4-175
Fig. 4-176
(6) Remove 1 E-ring.
Fig. 4-177
(7) Remove 4 screws, and then take off the
paper guide C [8].
Fig. 4-178
Fig. 4-179
(8) Remove 1 E-ring and slide the bearing [9] to
the inner side. Then take off the transport
roller [10].
Fig. 4-180
Fig. 4-181
Fig. 4-182
(3) Release 3 latches and take off the drawer
detection sensor [4].
Fig. 4-183
Fig. 4-184
Fig. 4-185
Notes:
When installing the sensors, make sure that
the protrusion of each sensor is inserted into
the hole of the bracket securely.
Fig. 4-186
Fig. 4-187
Fig. 4-188
Notes:
When installing the sensors, make sure that
the protrusion of each sensor is inserted into
the hole of the bracket securely.
Fig. 4-189
Fig. 4-190
Fig. 4-191
Fig. 4-192
Fig. 4-193
Fig. 4-194
(4) Remove 3 E-rings [6], 2 holders [7], 1 gear
[8] and 1 pin.
Notes:
Make sure that the holders are installed in a
correct position because those for the front
side differ from those for the rear side.
Fig. 4-195
Fig. 4-196
Fig. 4-197
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the
registration guide [1].
Fig. 4-198
Fig. 4-199
Fig. 4-200
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the registration sensor [2].
Fig. 4-201
Notes:
When installing the sensor, make sure that
the protrusion of the sensor is inserted into
the hole of the bracket securely.
Fig. 4-202
Fig. 4-203
(5) Remove the registration roller (metal) [2] by
sliding it to the rear side and pulling it out
toward you.
Notes: [2]
When removing the registration roller (metal)
[2], be careful not to hit the roller gear on the
rear side to the frame because it may scratch
the roller.
Fig. 4-204
Fig. 4-205
Fig. 4-206
Notes:
When installing the sensor, make sure that
the protrusion of the sensor is inserted into
the hole of the bracket securely.
Fig. 4-207
Fig. 4-208
Fig. 4-209
4.5.30 Drawer
[1]
Fig. 4-210
Fig. 4-211
Fig. 4-212
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3
screws, and then remove the registration
motor [1] with its bracket.
Notes:
When installing the motor, make sure that
the belt is hung on the gear and the pulley of
the motor securely.
Fig. 4-213
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the
registration motor [1].
Fig. 4-214
Fig. 4-215
Remarks:
[A] Transport motor-1 (M40)
[B] Transport motor-2 (M41)
[C] 1st/2nd drawer feed motor
Fig. 4-216
Fig. 4-217
Fig. 4-218
Fig. 4-219
Fig. 4-220
Fig. 4-221
Fig. 4-222
(3) Release the harness from 5 harness clamps.
Remove 4 screws and release the bracket
[1].
Fig. 4-223
Fig. 4-224
4.5.39 3rd drawer transport clutch (CLT4)/3rd drawer feed clutch (CLT5)
Fig. 4-225
(4) Disconnect 1 connector.
Remove 1 bushing [4] and 2 clips [5].
Remove the 3rd drawer transport clutch [6]
from the shaft.
Fig. 4-226
Fig. 4-227
Notes:
• When installing, be sure to align the
protrusion of the clutch to the position
shown in the figure.
• The color of the harnesses for the drawer
transport clutch and for the drawer feed
clutch is different. When installing, be
sure to attach the corresponding harness.
Black: 3rd drawer transport clutch
harness [10]
Red: 3rd drawer feed clutch harness [11]
Fig. 4-228
4.5.40 4th drawer transport clutch (CLT6)/4th drawer feed clutch (CLT7)
Fig. 4-229
Fig. 4-230
(5) Disconnect 1 connector.
Remove 1 bushing [6] and 2 clips [7].
Remove the 4th drawer feed clutch [8] from
the shaft.
Fig. 4-231
Notes:
1. When installing, be sure to align the
protrusion of the clutch to the position
shown in the figure.
2. The color of the harnesses for the drawer
transport clutch and for the drawer feed
clutch is different. When installing, be
sure to attach the corresponding harness.
Yellow: 4th drawer transport clutch
harness [9]
Blue: 4th drawer feed clutch harness [10]
Fig. 4-232
Fig. 4-233
(6) Release 6 latches and remove the cover [3].
Notes:
Be careful in taking off the cover because
there is a spring in the tray drive unit.
Fig. 4-234
(7) Remove the tray-up motor [4].
Fig. 4-235
Fig. 4-236
Fig. 4-237
(4) Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 4 screws
and take off the tray drive unit [2].
Fig. 4-238
Fig. 4-239
(6) Remove the tray-up motor [4].
Fig. 4-240
Notes:
Match the hole of the gear with the boss of
the cover when installing the motor.
Fig. 4-241
Fig. 4-242
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the
middle guide [1].
Fig. 4-243
(4) Remove 1 screw and 1 harness clamp.
Remove the plate [2] by sliding it.
Fig. 4-244
Fig. 4-245
Fig. 4-246
Fig. 4-247
[3]
Fig. 4-248
(6) Release 4 latches and remove the T-LCF
tray-up motor [4].
[4]
Fig. 4-249
Fig. 4-250
Fig. 4-251
(4) Release 2 latches and remove the coupling
[2] and spring [3].
[2]
[3]
Fig. 4-252
[4]
Fig. 4-253
Fig. 4-254
(3) Insert the tandem LCF feeding unit [2].
Fig. 4-255
Fig. 4-256
Fig. 4-257
Fig. 4-258
Fig. 4-259
(4) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the plate
[3].
Notes: [3]
The direction of the plate differs depending
on the destination (A4/LT).
LT
Fig. 4-260
(5) Disconnect 1 connector, and then take off the
T-LCF stopper opening/closing solenoid [5]
(front) [4].
(6) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the T-LCF stopper
opening/closing detection sensor (front) [5].
[4]
Fig. 4-261
[1]
Fig. 4-262
(3) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the plate
[2]. [2]
Notes:
The direction of the plate differs depending
on the destination (A4/LT).
LT
Fig. 4-263
(4) Disconnect 1 connector, and then take off the
T-LCF stopper opening/closing solenoid [4]
(rear) [3].
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the T-LCF stopper
opening/closing detection sensor (rear) [4].
[3]
Fig. 4-264
Fig. 4-265
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the T-LCF bottom [2]
sensor [2].
Fig. 4-266
4.5.51 T-LCF standby side tray paper amount detection sensor (S106)
[1]
Fig. 4-267
Fig. 4-268
(4) Remove 1 screw, and then take off the rear
fence [3]. [3]
Fig. 4-269
(5) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
bracket [4].
[4]
Fig. 4-270
Fig. 4-271
[1]
Fig. 4-272
(2) Remove 1 screw, and then take off the
sensor cover [2]. [2]
Fig. 4-273
Fig. 4-274
Fig. 4-275
(3) Remove 1 screw, and then take off the
sensor cover [2]. [2]
Fig. 4-276
Fig. 4-277
Fig. 4-278
(4) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
sensor bracket [2]. [3]
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the T-LCF standby
side empty sensor [3].
[2]
Fig. 4-279
Fig. 4-280
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the T-
LCF standby side tray detection sensor [2].
Fig. 4-281
Fig. 4-282
Fig. 4-283
Fig. 4-284
(3) Remove 2 E-rings and take off 2 bushings
[3].
Fig. 4-285
Fig. 4-286
Fig. 4-287
Fig. 4-288
(3) Pull out the left TBU lifting lever [2] toward
you until it reaches to the mark [3]. [3]
[2]
Fig. 4-289
(4) Turn the right TBU lifting lever [1] to the left
for 90 degrees. 2 1
(5) Turn the TBU locking lever [4] for 45 degrees
(right hand).
[1]
[4]
Fig. 4-290
[5]
[5]
Fig. 4-291
(7) Turn the EPU locking lever [5] for 90
degrees.
[5]
[5]
Fig. 4-292
(8) Pull out the process unit [6] by holding the
EPU locking lever [5].
Fig. 4-293
Fig. 4-294
Fig. 4-295
Fig. 4-296
Fig. 4-297
Fig. 4-298
3. Turn both levers outside by 90 degrees
and push them down.
1 1
2 2
Fig. 4-299
Fig. 4-300
Notes:
When you hold the drum cleaner unit, hold
the part [A] shown in the figure. Do not touch
the part [B] because grease will adhere to
your hands.
Fig. 4-301
Fig. 4-302
Fig. 4-303
4.6.3 Drum
Fig. 4-304
Fig. 4-305
Fig. 4-307
0 mm
0 mm
then install it with 2 screws.
2. Install the 2 blade side seals [1] following [2] [2]
the standard shown in the figure.
0~0.3 mm 0~0.3 mm
Fig. 4-308
[1]
[2]
Fig. 4-309
Fig. 4-310
Fig. 4-311
Fig. 4-312
Fig. 4-313
Fig. 4-314
[1]
Fig. 4-315
4.6.11 Sub-hopper
Fig. 4-316
Fig. 4-317
(4) Release 2 hooks on the both sides.
(5) Remove the sub-hopper [1].
Fig. 4-318
Fig. 4-319
Fig. 4-320
Fig. 4-321
Fig. 4-322
Fig. 4-323
Fig. 4-324
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the sub-
hopper toner motor [2].
Fig. 4-325
Fig. 4-326
Fig. 4-327
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the
auger lock detection sensor [3].
Fig. 4-328
Fig. 4-329
[1]
Fig. 4-330
Fig. 4-331
Fig. 4-332
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the
motor holder [1].
Fig. 4-333
(4) Release 2 hooks and take off the duct [2].
Fig. 4-334
Fig. 4-335
(6) Release 1 lock and remove the needle
electrode cleaner motor [4].
Notes:
When installing the motor, engage the
locking part with the recessed part of the
motor.
Fig. 4-336
Fig. 4-337
Fig. 4-338
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the solenoid
holder [2] by sliding it.
Fig. 4-339
(5) Disconnect the joint of the link arm [3].
Fig. 4-340
Fig. 4-341
(7) Release the harness from the hook of the
harness holder and remove the V0 sensor
shutter solenoid [5].
Fig. 4-342
Fig. 4-343
Fig. 4-344
(4) Remove the shutter [4] by sliding it while
lifting the edge [3] of the shutter.
Fig. 4-345
(5) Release 2 hooks.
Fig. 4-346
Fig. 4-347
Fig. 4-348
Fig. 4-349
[2]
Fig. 4-350
(6) Release 1 lock [3] to set up a stay [4].
Notes:
Hold the upper side of the stay. Avoid [4]
touching its shutter.
[3]
Fig. 4-351
(7) Remove the duct [5].
[5]
Fig. 4-352
Fig. 4-353
(9) While lifting the rear side of the developer
unit [6], slide it toward the rear and remove it.
Notes:
1. When installing or taking off the developer
[6]
unit, be careful not to hit the unit to the
surrounding parts, especially to a sensor
at the bottom of the EPU tray.
Fig. 4-354
2. Never turn the coupling [7] behind the
developer unit in a direction opposite to
the one shown with the arrow.
[7]
Fig. 4-355
Fig. 4-356
(3) Remove the developer upper unit [2] by
sliding it.
[2]
Fig. 4-357
Notes:
When removing the developer upper unit, be
sure not to lose the springs.
Fig. 4-358
Fig. 4-359
Notes:
When installing the developer upper unit,
insert its rear side into the developer unit first
and then its front side downward, while
paying attention that the sponge does not
end up inside the case.
If the sponge ends up inside the case, it may
cause the leakage of the developer material.
Fig. 4-360
Fig. 4-361
Fig. 4-362
Fig. 4-363
1 3
Fig. 4-364
Notes:
• When attaching the scraper [1], pass it through the hole [2].
• The scraper is moved in the direction of the arrow when the coupling is rotated clockwise.
• Do not rotate the coupling counterclockwise.
[1]
[2]
Fig. 4-365
[3]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 4-366
[7]
[6] 4
Fig. 4-367
(5) Take out the mixer-1 [8].
[8]
Fig. 4-368
(6) Remove the E-ring [9], bearing [10], oil seal
[11] and bushing [12].
[12]
Notes:
Be sure to attach the oil seal in the direction [11]
shown in the figure.
[10]
[9]
Fig. 4-369
[13]
Fig. 4-370
(8) Remove the E-ring [14], gear [15] and
bushing [16].
[16]
[14]
[15]
Fig. 4-371
(9) Remove the bearing [17] and oil seal [18].
Notes:
Be sure to attach the oil seal in the direction
shown in the figure.
[17]
[18]
Fig. 4-372
[19] 4
Fig. 4-373
(11) Remove the E-ring [20], bearing [21], oil seal
[22] and bushing [23].
[23]
Notes:
• Be sure to attach the oil seal in the [22]
direction shown in the figure.
[21]
[20]
Fig. 4-374
Fig. 4-375
Fig. 4-376
(3) Release 1 latch and remove the recovery
roller [2].
Fig. 4-377
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the polarity
adjustment plate [3].
[3]
Notes:
• Before disassembling, record (mark if
any) the scale pointed by the polarity
adjustment lever. Then match the polarity
adjustment plate at the scale previously
recorded when reassembling.
• When installing the polarity adjustment
plate, make sure that the shaft of the
developer sleeve and the polarity
adjustment plate [3] are stable.
Fig. 4-378
Fig. 4-379
(6) Remove the E-ring and gear [5] on the rear
side.
Fig. 4-380
(7) Remove 2 screws.
Fig. 4-381
Fig. 4-382
(9) Remove 2 bearings [8].
(10) Remove the developer sleeve [9].
Fig. 4-383
Fig. 4-384
Fig. 4-385
Notes:
1. Be careful not to hit the edge and the
coupling (circled in the figure) of the drum
drive unit. When you place the unit, set it
up as shown in the figure.
2. Do not disassemble the drum drive unit
because it is assembled using a jig very
precisely.
Fig. 4-386
Fig. 4-387
Fig. 4-388
Fig. 4-389
[1]
Fig. 4-390
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [2]
by sliding it.
[2]
Fig. 4-391
(5) Remove the EPU tray developer unit cooling
duct [3] by sliding it.
[3]
Fig. 4-392
Fig. 4-393
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the TBU
cleaner side vertical duct [2].
[2]
Fig. 4-394
Fig. 4-395
Fig. 4-396
(2) Take out the waste toner box [2].
Fig. 4-397
(3) Attach the cap [3].
Fig. 4-398
Fig. 4-399
(3) Lower the dowel [2] located at the upper of
the waste toner case [3].
Fig. 4-400
(4) Hold up the bottom of the waste toner case
[3] and remove the dowel [2]. Remove the
waste toner case [3] by lowering it.
Fig. 4-401
Fig. 4-402
(6) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches, and then remove the waste toner
amount detection sensor [5].
Fig. 4-403
Fig. 4-404
Fig. 4-405
Fig. 4-406
Fig. 4-407
Fig. 4-408
Fig. 4-409
Fig. 4-410
Fig. 4-411
Fig. 4-412
Fig. 4-413
Fig. 4-414
Fig. 4-415
Fig. 4-416
Fig. 4-417
(5) Remove 2 screws and pull the toner cover [2]
a little toward you to release the hook.
Remove the toner cover [2] by lifting it up a
little.
Fig. 4-418
(6) Remove 2 screws and 2 stays [3].
Fig. 4-419
Fig. 4-420
(8) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the
toner motor assembly [5].
Fig. 4-421
(9) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-422
Fig. 4-423
(11) Remove the spring [7]. Remove 1 screw and
take off the toner motor bracket [8].
Fig. 4-424
(12) Remove 2 screws and take off the toner
motor [9].
Fig. 4-425
Fig. 4-426
Fig. 4-427
(5) Remove 2 screws, 1 C-ring [4] and 1 bushing
[5], and then take off the bracket [6].
Fig. 4-428
Fig. 4-429
Fig. 4-430
Fig. 4-431
Fig. 4-432
Fig. 4-433
(5) Remove 3 screws and disconnect 1
connector, and then take off the duct [2].
Fig. 4-434
Fig. 4-435
(7) Release the harness from 2 harness guides
and remove the ozone suctioning fun [3].
Fig. 4-436
Fig. 4-438
(8) Remove 1 screw and take off the switch
cover [4].
Fig. 4-439
(9) Remove 2 screws and take off the toner
guide [5] by sliding it to the left and pulling it
out toward you.
Fig. 4-440
Fig. 4-441
(11) Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser
insulation fan [7]. Release the harness from
the harness guide.
Fig. 4-442
Fig. 4-443
Fig. 4-444
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the
temperature/humidity sensor [1].
Fig. 4-445
Fig. 4-446
Fig. 4-447
(7) Remove 2 screws and take off the switch
cover [4].
Fig. 4-448
(8) Disconnect 2 connectors and release the
harness from the harness clamp [5].
(9) Remove 2 screws and take off the switch
bracket [6].
Fig. 4-449
Fig. 4-450
Fig. 4-451
Fig. 4-452
Fig. 4-453
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket [1]
and duct [2].
Fig. 4-454
(6) Rotate 2 clamps by 90 degrees to take them
off.
Fig. 4-455
Fig. 4-456
(8) Remove 2 screws.
Fig. 4-457
(9) Remove the duct [3].
Fig. 4-458
Fig. 4-459
Fig. 4-460
(4) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-461
Fig. 4-462
Fig. 4-463
[1]
Fig. 4-464
(4) Lift up the EPU locking levers [2].
[2]
[2]
Fig. 4-465
(5) Turn the EPU locking levers [2] for 90
degrees.
[2]
[2]
Fig. 4-466
Fig. 4-467
Notes:
When installing or removing the transfer belt unit (EPU tray), make sure that the duplexing unit is
pulled out fully. Moreover, check that the transfer belt unit is completely set before the duplexing
unit is closed.
If the transfer belt unit and duplexing unit are under the following states, parts may be damaged.
1. When the duplexing unit is opened or closed without fully pulling out or closing the transfer
belt unit (EPU unit)
2. When the transfer belt unit is pulled out or closed without fully opening the duplexing unit
• The clips on both edges of the 2nd transfer roller may fall off.
• The 2nd transfer unit front guide may be damaged.
• The transfer belt may be damaged.
• The 2nd transfer roller may be damaged.
• The bearings on both edges of the 2nd transfer roller may fall off.
• The 2nd transfer unit (TRU) may fall off.
Fig. 4-468
Fig. 4-469
Fig. 4-470
Fig. 4-471
(3) Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit [2]
while pushing the lever [1] on the front side.
Fig. 4-472
Notes:
When taking off the TBU cleaner, clean it if it [3]
is dusty or stained [3].
When the film [4] sheet indicated by the
figure gets dusty or stained [3].
[3][4]
Fig. 4-473
Fig. 4-474
Fig. 4-475
Notes:
• When installing the transfer belt cleaner 0~0.5 mm 0~0.5 mm
side seals, install them following the
standard shown in the figure.
1. Install the 2 transfer belt cleaner side
0.5 ~ 1.5 mm
0.5 ~ 1.5 mm
Fig. 4-476
Fig. 4-478
Fig. 4-479
Fig. 4-481
Notes:
When installing the belt guide [1], tilt it by
approx. 20 degrees and insert it to the shaft, [1] [2] [1] [3]
and then let it go down under its own weight.
When it does not go down under its weight,
reinstall it because the belt [2] might get on
the rib [3] of the guide.
[4]: Pully
[4]
Fig. 4-482
(3) Remove 1 screw and a stay [5].
[5]
Fig. 4-483
[7]
Fig. 4-484
(6) Fold the frame with its rear side down.
(7) Pull out the transfer belt [8] upward to take it
off. [8] [9]
Notes:
When replacing the transfer belt, check the
cleanable facing roller, 2nd transfer facing
roller and tension roller, and clean them with
alcohol. If 1st transfer roller has foreign
matter adhering to it, remove this before
installing the transfer belt.
Fig. 4-485
Notes:
1. Install the transfer belt in the middle so
that it will not move to one side.
2. When installing, be sure that the serial
number [9] indicated the inside of the belt
is shown at the front side.
3. Do not touch the belt surface directly with
bare hands.
4. Be sure not to scratch the belt surface.
5. When replacing the transfer belt, clean
the cleanable facing roller, 2nd transfer
facing roller, tension roller and idling roller -0.5 0 0.5
with alcohol.
6. Attach a belt guide so that the rib of the Fig. 4-486
transfer belt will not be run on the
detection roller.
7. After the transfer belt is installed, rotate
the cleanable facing roller in the direction
of the arrow to set the value of the cutting
angle indicator to 0+/-0.5 degree.
[1] 4
Fig. 4-487
(3) Take off the 1st transfer roller [2].
[2]
Fig. 4-488
[1]
Fig. 4-489
[2]
Fig. 4-490
(4) Take off the cleanable facing roller assembly
[3].
[3]
Fig. 4-491
(5) Remove 2 E-rings, 1 gear [6], 1 pin [7] and 4
bearings [5] from the cleanable facing roller
[4].
[5]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[5]
[4]
Fig. 4-492
[1]
Fig. 4-493
(3) Move the bearing [2] to the inner side and
then take off the tension roller [3]. [2]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 4-494
[1]
Fig. 4-495
[2]
Fig. 4-496
(4) Take off the 2nd transfer facing roller [3].
[3]
Fig. 4-497
Fig. 4-498
Fig. 4-499
(4) Remove the 2nd transfer unit [3] not to hit the
unit to the registration roller or other parts.
Fig. 4-500
Notes:
• When installing, make sure that 2 pins [4]
on the rear side are inserted to the
rectangular holes [5] of the 2nd transfer
unit.
• Be sure to take off the 2nd transfer roller
[2] before the 2nd transfer unit rear guide
[3] is removed. Moreover, be sure to
install the 2nd transfer unit rear guide [3]
before the 2nd transfer roller [2] is
attached. If they are installed in the
incorrect order, this will cause an error
due to a conduction failure or a defective
image. Fig. 4-501
(1) Pull the 2 levers [1] toward you and take off
the 2nd transfer roller unit [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
Fig. 4-502
(2) Remove the clip [3] on the rear side, 1
bearing [4] and 1 bushing [5].
(3) Remove the clip [6] on the front side, 1
bearing [7] and 1 bushing [8].
Fig. 4-503
Notes:
Since the bearing [9] is press-fitted in the
bushing [5] [8], be sure to remove it straight
so that it does not fall off.
Fig. 4-504
[1] [1]
[3]
Remarks:
[2] 2nd transfer roller
[3] 2nd transfer unit rear guide
[4] 2nd transfer unit front guide [2]
[4]
Fig. 4-505
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the 2nd
transfer unit rear guide [3].
[3]
Notes:
Be sure to take off the 2nd transfer roller [2]
before the 2nd transfer unit rear guide [3] is
removed. Moreover, be sure to install the
2nd transfer unit rear guide [3] before the
2nd transfer roller [2] is attached. If they are
installed in the incorrect order, this will cause
an error due to a conduction failure or a
defective image.
Fig. 4-506
(4) Release the harness from the hook of the
2nd transfer unit rear guide [3].
(5) Remove the 2nd transfer unit rear guide [3] [3]
from the metal plate [5]. [5]
Fig. 4-507
Fig. 4-508
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 4
screws, and then take off the transfer belt
motor [2].
Fig. 4-509
Fig. 4-510
Fig. 4-511
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and release the
harness from 1 harness clamp [2]. Remove 1
harness clamp [3] and take off the transfer
belt motor unit [4].
Fig. 4-512
Fig. 4-513
Fig. 4-514
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove the
image quality control unit [1].
Fig. 4-515
Fig. 4-516
Fig. 4-517
Fig. 4-518
(3) Remove the link arm [2] of the image quality
shutter solenoid [1].
Fig. 4-519
b c
Fig. 4-521
Fig. 4-522
Fig. 4-523
Notes:
Fix the screw in the position as shown in the
figure unless paper wrinkle or paper jams
occur at the entrance of the fuser unit.
Fig. 4-524
Fig. 4-525
(3) Remove 3 screws and take off the separation
guide [2].
Notes:
• The shoulder screws are used on the
front side and rear side. When installing,
pay attention not to confuse them with
other kinds of screws.
• Make sure that the pieces of Teflon tapes
attached to the separation guide are
adhering properly and moreover that they
are not dirty.
• If toner adheres to the separation guide,
wipe it off with a dry cloth.
Fig. 4-526
[2]
Fig. 4-527
Fig. 4-528
(3) Remove 2 springs [2] and take off the
separation plate [3].
Notes:
Make sure that the pieces of Teflon tapes
attached to the separation plate are adhering
properly and moreover that they are not dirty.
Fig. 4-529
Fig. 4-530
Fig. 4-531
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the plate [1].
Fig. 4-532
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the plate [2].
Fig. 4-533
Fig. 4-534
(6) Remove 1 E-ring, and then take off the
pressure roller contact/release cam [4] and 1
pin. Remove 1 E-ring and take off the gear
[5].
Fig. 4-535
(7) Remove 3 screw and 1 bushing, and then
take off the plate [6].
Fig. 4-536
Fig. 4-537
(9) Remove 1 screw and take off the harness
from the harness holder [11].
Fig. 4-538
(10) Remove 1 screw and take off the sensor
bracket [12]. Release the harness from 1
harness clamp.
[12]
Fig. 4-539
Fig. 4-540
(12) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-541
(13) Remove 2 screws and take off the connector
bracket [13]. [13]
Fig. 4-542
Fig. 4-543
(15) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-544
(16) Release the harness from 1 harness clamp.
Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket
[14].
Fig. 4-545
Fig. 4-546
Fig. 4-547
Fig. 4-548
Notes:
The fuser belt supplied as a service part
consists of the following parts.
When replacing the fuser belt, exchange
them all in a set. An application of silicon oil
to the inside of the fuser belt is required.
- Fuser belt
- Fuser belt lubricating sheet
- Oil recovery sheets (4 types)
- Silicon oil
Fig. 4-549
Fig. 4-550
[19]
Fig. 4-551
Fig. 4-552
[1]
4
[1]
Fig. 4-553
(3) Tilt the gear side of the fuser belt [3]
downward. Pour the entire amount of silicon
oil [2] into the fuser belt [3] without spilling.
This should be done from the rear side [2]
where there is no gear.
Notes:
• Be sure to hold the gear portion when
handling the fuser belt to avoid damage to
its belt.
• Pour the entire amount without leaving
any of silicone oil.
• Silicon oil has a low viscosity and is easy [3]
to spill. Therefore, do not tilt it downwards
at the no-gear side. Fig. 4-554
(4) To spread silicon oil inside the fuser belt [3],
rotate it a few times.
[3]
Notes:
Silicon oil has a low viscosity and is easy to
spill. Therefore, do not tilt it downwards at
the no-gear side.
Fig. 4-555
[4]
[4]
Fig. 4-556
Notes:
• Take care so that no damage or stains
are detected on the fuser belt.
• When attaching the fuser belt, gently [5]
press the fuser belt thermistor [4] with
your fingers to prevent its deformation.
• After reassembling the fuser belt, check
that there is no scratch on the surface
and the edges of the belt, and check that
the silicon oil has not adhered on the belt [5]
surface.
If silicon oil is running over more than 25
mm from the edge of the fuser belt, wipe it
off using alcohol. If 25 mm or less, wipe it Fig. 4-557
off with a dry cloth.
Fig. 4-558
Fig. 4-559
(4) Remove the fuser belt pad [4].
Fig. 4-560
Notes:
• When installing the fuser belt pad, align
the 5 latches with the holes of fuser belt
lubricating sheet.
Fig. 4-561
Fig. 4-562
Fig. 4-563
(3) Remove the rear fuser cover oil recovery
sheet [2] from the cover.
[2]
Fig. 4-564
Fig. 4-565
[3]
Fig. 4-566
[1]
Fig. 4-567
[3]
Fig. 4-568
[4]
[6]
Fig. 4-569
Fig. 4-570
Fig. 4-571
[1]
[2]
Fig. 4-572
(3) Remove the rear fuser gear oil recovery
sheet [3] from the actuator.
[3]
Fig. 4-573
Fig. 4-574
[4]
Fig. 4-575
Fig. 4-576
Fig. 4-577
(1) Remove 3 screws and take off the plate [1].
[1]
Fig. 4-578
(2) Remove the fuser belt pad [2] and the fuser
belt Lubricating [3] sheet. [3]
[2]
Fig. 4-579
[4]
Fig. 4-580
(4) Remove 2 brackets [5] and take off the
magnetic plate [6]. [6] [5]
[5]
Fig. 4-581
Notes:
No dents, scratches and deformation.
Fig. 4-582
Fig. 4-583
(5) Remove 2 screws and then take off the fuser
belt edge thermistor [7] and the fuser belt [8]
center thermistor [8].
Notes: [7]
The harness of the thermistor should be
wired inside the latches.
Fig. 4-584
Notes:
Since the detection portion of the thermistor
is easily deformed, be very careful that this
does not happen.
After installing the thermistor, the dimension
"A" in the figure below should be within 2 to 3 A
mm as a guide.
Fig. 4-585
[9]
[10]
Fig. 4-586
(8) Release the 4 latches and then take off the
cover [11] of the thermostat.
[11]
Fig. 4-587
(9) Take off the fuser belt thermostat [12].
[12]
Fig. 4-588
Fig. 4-589
Notes:
The spring [13] is mounted inside of the
holder of the thermostat.
If this spring has come off, insert its tip to the
hole of the holder as shown in the figure.
[13]
Fig. 4-590
(10) When installing the cover of the thermostat,
first hook the 2 latches at the left side and
then those at the right side.
[11]
Fig. 4-591
Fig. 4-592
Fig. 4-593
Fig. 4-594
Fig. 4-595
Fig. 4-596
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Release 3 latches
and remove fuser belt rotation detection
sensor [2].
Fig. 4-597
Fig. 4-598
Fig. 4-599
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the sensor
bracket [4]. Release the harness from 1
harness clamp.
Fig. 4-600
(5) Disconnect 1 connector. Release 3 latches
and take off the pressure roller contact/
release sensor [5].
Fig. 4-601
Fig. 4-602
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the harness
cover [2].
Fig. 4-603
(6) Release the harness from 3 harness clamps.
Fig. 4-604
Fig. 4-605
(8) Remove 3 screws and take off the IH coil [4].
Notes: [4]
The gap of the IH coil is adjusted, so be sure
not to remove any other 3 screws [5] other
than those from the bracket.
Fig. 4-606
Notes:
Count the number of lines [6] and write it
down for later reference before removing the
IH coil.When installing the IH coil, the same
number of lines needs to be visible.
Fig. 4-607
Fig. 4-608
Fig. 4-609
(4) Remove 4 screws and take off the fuser drive
unit [1].
Fig. 4-610
[4]
4
Fig. 4-611
(6) Remove the bearing [5] and the gears [6],
[7], [8] and [9]. [5]
[5] [8]
Notes:
When replacing the parts, apply an [6]
appropriate amount of white grease [7]
(Molykote EM-30L) to the tooth surface of
the gears. [9]
Fig. 4-612
(7) Remove 2 screws and take off the pressure
roller contact/release motor [10].
[10]
Fig. 4-613
Fig. 4-614
Fig. 4-615
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and release the
harness from the harness guide [2].
Fig. 4-616
Fig. 4-617
Fig. 4-618
(3) Release the harness from 1 harness clamp.
Remove 2 screws and take off the IH board
cooling fan (suction) [2].
Notes:
When installing the fan, be sure that the
surface with the label [3] is shown at the
outside.
Fig. 4-619
Fig. 4-620
(4) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-621
(5) Remove 1 screw and take off the fuser unit
jam releasing LED [1].
Fig. 4-622
[1]
4
Fig. 4-623
Fig. 4-624
Fig. 4-625
(4) Release the harness from 5 harness clamps
and remove the lower exit section cooling fan
(rear) [1] and lower exit section cooling fan
(front) [2].
Fig. 4-626
Fig. 4-627
Fig. 4-628
(4) Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1
connector, and then remove the exit motor
[1] with the bracket [2].
Fig. 4-629
Fig. 4-630
4.10.5 Upper paper exit sensor (S61) / Upper exit tray paper full
detection sensor (S62)
Fig. 4-631
(4) Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1
connector, and then take off the upper paper
exit roller unit [2].
Fig. 4-632
Fig. 4-633
(7) Remove the upper paper exit sensor [8] from
the sensor bracket [7].
Fig. 4-634
Fig. 4-635
Fig. 4-636
Fig. 4-637
(3) Release the harness from the 3 hooks [2]
and then disconnect the connector.
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the reverse
section stationary jam detection sensor [4]
from the sensor bracket [3].
Fig. 4-638
Fig. 4-639
(3) Remove the sensor cover [2]. Remove 2
screws and take off the sensor bracket [3].
Fig. 4-640
Notes:
When installing the sensor bracket, be
careful not to catch the harness with the
bracket.
Fig. 4-641
Fig. 4-642
Fig. 4-643
Fig. 4-644
Fig. 4-645
Fig. 4-646
(3) Remove the E-rings and take off the gears
[2].
Fig. 4-647
(4) Remove 1 E-ring and 2 bearings [3], and
then take off the lower paper exit roller [4].
Fig. 4-648
(1) Open the front cover and pull out the bridge
unit [1].
Fig. 4-649
(2) Remove 4 screws from a rail.
(3) Remove the bridge unit [1].
Fig. 4-650
Notes:
When installing the bridge unit, engage the
dent of the unit with the 4 bosses of the rail.
Fig. 4-651
(1) Open the front cover and then pull out the
bridge unit.
(2) Open the bridge unit lower cover [1] and then
remove 3 screws from the bridge unit front
cover [2].
Fig. 4-652
(3) Open the bridge unit upper cover [3] and
then take off the bridge unit front cover [2]
while keeping the lever [4] of the bridge unit
lowered.
Fig. 4-653
(1) Open the front cover and then pull out the
bridge unit.
(2) Open the bridge unit lower cover [1]. Then
remove 1 screw and the wire [2].
Fig. 4-654
(3) Remove 1 clip and then take off the bridge
unit lower cover [1] by sliding it.
[1]
Fig. 4-655
Notes:
The leaf springs with the idling rollers are
usually not needed to be disassembled,
however, if they are removed and installed,
fix the screws while pushing the rollers in the
direction of the arrow in the figure to prevent
the exit paper side deviation.
After the rollers are installed, check that the
rollers are parallel to the installation holes.
When pressing the idling rollers, press them
in the direction opposite to each other
because the 2 leaf springs must be installed
in that manner.
Fig. 4-656
Fig. 4-657
(5) Remove 3 screws and then take off the
motor bracket [1].
[1]
Fig. 4-658
(6) Release the harness from 3 clamps.
Fig. 4-659
[2] 4
Fig. 4-660
(9) Take off the reverse motor [3] by removing 2
screws. [3]
Fig. 4-661
Fig. 4-662
Fig. 4-663
(5) Remove 4 screws and then take off the
motor bracket [2].
Fig. 4-664
(6) Disconnect the connector.
Fig. 4-665
Fig. 4-666
Fig. 4-667
(4) Remove 1 screw and then release the
stopper.
Fig. 4-668
Fig. 4-669
[1]
Fig. 4-670
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the roller
bracket [2].
[2]
Fig. 4-671
Fig. 4-672
(7) Remove 1 screw and then take off transport
guide-1 [3] by sliding it toward you.
(8) Remove 4 screws and then take off the [3]
transport guide-1 unit.
Fig. 4-673
(9) Remove the E-ring on the rear side and then
remove the gear.
Fig. 4-674
[4]
[4]
Fig. 4-675
Notes:
The leaf springs with the idling rollers are
usually not needed to be disassembled,
however, if they are removed and installed,
fix the screws while pushing the rollers in the
direction of the arrow in the figure to prevent
the exit paper side deviation.
After the rollers are installed, check that the
rollers are parallel to the installation holes.
Fig. 4-677
Fig. 4-678
(5) Take off the bridge unit transport roller-2 [3]
by removing 2 E-rings and a bearing [2].
[3]
[2]
[2]
Fig. 4-679
[1]
Fig. 4-680
[2]
Fig. 4-681
(6) Remove 2 E-rings and the 2 bushings to
remove the flap [3].
[3]
Fig. 4-682
(7) Remove the E-ring from the front side and
then take off the pulley and the belt.
Fig. 4-683
Fig. 4-684
(9) Remove 1 gear, 2 E-rings and 2 bearings [5].
Then take off bridge unit transport roller-3. [5]
[5]
Fig. 4-685
[2]
Fig. 4-687
Fig. 4-688
(6) Remove 1 E-ring and the bearing [2]. Then
take off bridge unit exit roller-1 [3]. [3]
[2]
Fig. 4-689
4
[1]
Fig. 4-690
(4) Remove 2 E-rings, 1 gear and 2 bearings [2].
Then take off bridge unit exit roller-2 [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
Fig. 4-691
Fig. 4-692
Fig. 4-693
(5) Take off the transport path switching solenoid
(bridge unit/reverse section) [2] by removing [2]
2 screws.
Front side
Fig. 4-694
Fig. 4-695
Front side
Fig. 4-696
Fig. 4-697
(3) Remove 1 screw and then take off the
sensor bracket [2].
(4) Release the harness from 1 clamp and then
disconnect the connector.
[2]
Fig. 4-698
[3]
Fig. 4-699
(1) Open the front cover and then pull out the
bridge unit.
(2) Remove 1 screw and then take off transport
guide-4 [1] by sliding it.
[1]
Fig. 4-700
(3) Release the harness from 1 harness clamp
[2]. Remove 1 harness clamp [3].
Fig. 4-701
[4]
Fig. 4-702
(5) Remove the bridge unit path exit sensor [5]
from the sensor bracket.
[5]
Fig. 4-703
(1) Open the front cover and then pull out the
bridge unit.
(2) Remove 3 screws and then remove the
sensor stay [1].
[1]
Fig. 4-704
[2]
Fig. 4-705
[1]
Fig. 4-706
(3) Remove 2 screws and then take off the roller
guide [2].
[2]
Fig. 4-707
[3]
Fig. 4-708
(5) Remove 1 screw and then take off the
sensor bracket [5].
(6) Release the harness from the clamp and [5]
then disconnect the connector.
Fig. 4-709
(7) Take off the reverse section stationary jam
detection sensor [6] from the sensor bracket.
[6]
Fig. 4-710
Fig. 4-711
(6) Remove 3 screws and take off the stay [2]
and cover [3].
Fig. 4-712
(7) Release the harness from the clamp and
then disconnect the connector [4].
(8) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 4-713
Fig. 4-714
(10) Remove the duct [6].
Fig. 4-715
(11) Release 9 latches and take off the duct cover
[7].
Fig. 4-716
Fig. 4-717
Fig. 4-718
Fig. 4-719
Fig. 4-720
Fig. 4-721
Fig. 4-722
Fig. 4-723
(4) Disconnect the connector from the duplexing
unit opening/closing detection sensor [3].
Notes:
When installing the sensor, be careful not to
bend the latches of the sensor.
Fig. 4-724
Fig. 4-725
Fig. 4-726
(4) Remove the pin [3] and take off the sensor
actuator [4].
Notes:
When installing the sensor, hook the spring
securely and make sure that the actuator
returned to its original position by the spring
force.
Fig. 4-727
(5) Remove 1 film [5] and take off the reverse
path sensor [6].
Notes:
When installing the sensor, be careful not to
bend the latches of the sensor.
Fig. 4-728
Fig. 4-729
(5) Remove 2 E-rings, 1 bushing [2] and 1
bearing [3], and then take off the duplexing
bridge transport roller [4].
Fig. 4-730
Fig. 4-731
(2) Open the duplexing unit cover [2].
Fig. 4-732
(3) Remove 2 screws and release 4 hooks, and
then take off the duplexing unit upper side
cover [3].
Fig. 4-733
Fig. 4-734
Fig. 4-735
(3) Release the hook by pushing the upper side
of the duplexing unit front side cover [1] to
the rear side, and then remove the duplexing
unit front side cover [1] by sliding it toward
the left side.
Fig. 4-736
Fig. 4-737
Notes:
When installing the cover, insert the 3 hooks
of the duplexing unit rear side cover into the
frame.
Fig. 4-738
Fig. 4-739
Fig. 4-740
(4) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-741
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the reversed
paper cooling fan [2].
Fig. 4-742
Fig. 4-743
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket [2]
from ADU transport motor [1].
Fig. 4-744
Fig. 4-745
Fig. 4-746
Fig. 4-747
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU
board [1].
Fig. 4-748
Fig. 4-750
(7) Remove 1 screw and the shoulder screw [4].
Then take off the front hook [3].
Notes:
The type of screw differs depending on its
installation position.
Fig. 4-751
Fig. 4-752
(9) Remove the clip from the front side of the
lever shaft, and then take off the bushing [9].
Fig. 4-753
(10) Remove the lever shaft [10] from the rear
side.
Fig. 4-754
Fig. 4-755
Fig. 4-756
(6) Remove 1 spring [2].
Notes:
Be careful because the spring force is quite
strong.
Fig. 4-757
Fig. 4-758
(8) Remove 2 E-rings, 1 clip [4], 3 pulleys [5]
and 2 belts [6].
Fig. 4-759
(9) Remove the E-ring and the pulley [7].
Fig. 4-760
Fig. 4-761
Fig. 4-762
(6) Remove 2 E-rings and 2 bearings [4], and
take off ADU transport roller-3 [5].
Fig. 4-763
Fig. 4-764
(4) Remove the duplexing unit path exit sensor
[3] from the sensor bracket [1].
Fig. 4-765
Fig. 4-766
Fig. 4-767
(4) Disconnect 1 connector from the fuser
transport sensor [4].
Fig. 4-768
(5) Remove 1 screw and the film, and take off
the fuser transport sensor [4] from its bracket
[3].
Fig. 4-769
Fig. 4-770
(3) Remove 1 screw and then take off a sensor
bracket [2].
(4) Disconnect 1 connector from the duplexing
unit path entrance sensor [3].
Fig. 4-771
(5) Remove the duplexing unit path entrance
sensor [3] from the sensor bracket [2].
Fig. 4-772
Fig. 4-773
(3) Release 1 clamp and disconnect 3
connectors [3] from the duplexing unit
interlock switch / duplexing unit cover
opening/closing detection switch [2].
Fig. 4-774
Fig. 4-775
Fig. 4-776
(4) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-777
(5) Push the latches and remove the IH interlock
switch [3] from the bracket [4].
Fig. 4-778
Fig. 4-780
(8) Remove 2 screws and 1 harness clamp, and
then remove the switch bracket [3].
Fig. 4-781
Fig. 4-782
(10) Push the latches and remove the interlock
switch [2] from the switch bracket [3].
Fig. 4-783
4.10.51 Fuser unit exhaust heat fan / Bridge unit exhaust heat fan (F1/F2)
Fig. 4-784
Fig. 4-785
(4) Disconnect 2 connectors. Release 3 hooks
[3] and remove the fan with its duct [4].
Fig. 4-786
(5) Disconnect 1 connector [5]. Release 2 hooks
[6] and remove the Bridge unit exhaust heat
fan [7].
(6) Disconnect 1 connector [8]. Release 2 hooks
[9] and remove the Fuser unit exhaust heat
fan [10].
Fig. 4-787
[1]
Fig. 4-788
[2]
Fig. 4-789
Fig. 4-791
(4) Remove 2 screws.
Fig. 4-792
Fig. 4-793
(6) Open the DSDF [2] and remove 2 screws.
Then take off the DSDF [2] by sliding it to the
rear side.
Notes:
Be sure not to remove the red screws.
Otherwise, the adjustment of the position will
be required.
Fig. 4-794
Fig. 4-795
Fig. 4-796
(3) Tighten 2 screws with 2 washers on the rear
side temporarily.
Notes:
When the screw is tightened temporarily,
make a gap by 1 mm or less between its
lower surface and the upper surface of the
washer so that the hinge can be slid.
Fig. 4-797
(4) Adjust the DSDF.
P. 6-76 "6.12.1 Adjustment of Position"
Notes:
After adjusting the DSDF, tighten 2 screws
on the front side and 2 screws with 2
washers on the rear side.
(5) Install the hinge cover.
Fig. 4-798
Fig. 4-799
(7) Connect the communication connector.
Fig. 4-800
(8) Install the SYS board cover and rear cover.
(9) Reset the platen sheet.
P. 6-93 "6.12.8 Platen Sheet"
Fig. 4-801
Fig. 4-802
Fig. 4-803
Fig. 4-804
Fig. 4-805
(3) Turn the arm [5] to release the lock.
Fig. 4-806
Fig. 4-807
Fig. 4-808
Fig. 4-809
Fig. 4-810
Fig. 4-811
(6) Slide the DSDF separation roller unit [8] to
the front side to take it off.
Fig. 4-812
Fig. 4-813
(7) Take off the lever [7] of the rear side from the
DSDF separation roller unit [8].
(8) Release the latch and take off the DSDF
separation roller [9].
Fig. 4-814
Fig. 4-815
Fig. 4-816
Fig. 4-817
Fig. 4-818
Fig. 4-819
Fig. 4-820
Fig. 4-821
Fig. 4-822
(3) Open the original jam access cover and
remove 2 screws [1][2].
Remarks:
[1] Screw for the metal part (paper feed side)
[2] Screw for the plastic part (paper exit side)
(4) While lifting up the original tray [3], remove
the DSDF rear cover [4].
Fig. 4-823
Fig. 4-824
Fig. 4-825
Fig. 4-826
(4) Remove 1 screw and the hinge pin [2] of the
rear side.
Fig. 4-827
Fig. 4-828
(7) Turn the original jam access cover [4] to the
direction for closing it and lift it up to remove
it.
Notes:
When installing and taking off the original
jam access cover, be careful not to damage it
or the transport guide of the DSDF left cover.
Fig. 4-829
Fig. 4-830
Fig. 4-831
[1]
[6]
Fig. 4-832
FFC
Lever position: Released
Connector
Fig. 4-834
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF
control PC board [13].
Notes:
• When installing the flat cable, do not push
it in strongly.
• When installing the flat cable, be careful
not to insert it at an angle.
• Do not apply pressure to or damage the
edge of the flat cable.
• When installing a flat cable, make sure
that the conductor side will be the upper
side.
Fig. 4-835
Fig. 4-836
(4) Remove 1 screw and then take off the
original tray bracket [23] and the original tray
holder [10].
[23] [10]
Fig. 4-837
(5) Take off the original tray [11].
Fig. 4-838
Fig. 4-839
(3) Disconnect 1 connector respectively from the
DSDF tray original length sensor-1 [15] and
the DSDF tray original length sensor-2 [16].
(4) Release the latch from each sensor. Take off
the DSDF tray original length sensor-1 [15]
and the DSDF tray original length sensor-2
[16].
Fig. 4-840
Fig. 4-841
Fig. 4-842
Fig. 4-843
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the
DSDF tray original width sensor [20].
Fig. 4-844
Fig. 4-845
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latch
and take off the DSDF original empty sensor
[21].
Fig. 4-846
4.11.18 DSDF feed sensor (SD5) / DSDF tray lift upper limit sensor (SD9)
Fig. 4-847
Fig. 4-848
Fig. 4-849
(4) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latch
and take off the DSDF feed sensor [2].
Fig. 4-850
Fig. 4-851
Fig. 4-852
(3) While pulling the lever, take off the top cover
[1].
Fig. 4-853
Fig. 4-854
(5) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latch
and take off the DSDF original width
detection sensor-1 [5].
(6) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latch
and take off the DSDF original width
detection sensor-2 [6].
Fig. 4-855
Fig. 4-856
Fig. 4-857
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the left top
cover [4].
Fig. 4-858
(5) Disconnect 2 connectors [9].
(6) Remove 10 screws and take off the stay [7].
Fig. 4-859
Fig. 4-860
(7) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the
DSDF registration sensor [8].
Fig. 4-861
Fig. 4-862
Fig. 4-863
Fig. 4-864
Fig. 4-865
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [9] from the DSDF
registration motor.
Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF
registration motor bracket [10].
Notes:
• When installing the DSDF registration
motor bracket, be sure to hook the pulley
to the timing belt.
• The harness color of the DSDF
registration motor is gray, be sure to
check the harness color at installing.
Fig. 4-866
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF
registration motor [11] from the DSDF
registration motor bracket [10].
Fig. 4-867
Fig. 4-868
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [12] from the DSDF
read motor.
(4) Remove the tension spring [13].
Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF
read motor bracket [14].
Notes:
• When installing the DSDF read motor
bracket, be sure to hook the pulley to the
timing belt.
• When installing, temporarily tighten 2
screws, hook the tension spring and then
securely tighten them.
Fig. 4-869
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF
read motor from the DSDF read motor
bracket.
Fig. 4-870
Fig. 4-871
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [15] from the DSDF
exit motor.
(4) Remove the tension spring [16].
Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF exit
motor bracket [17].
Notes:
• When installing the DSDF exit motor
bracket, be sure to hook the pulley to the
timing belt.
• When installing, temporarily tighten 2
screws, hook the tension spring and then
securely tighten them.
Fig. 4-872
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF exit
motor [18] from the DSDF exit motor bracket
[17].
Fig. 4-873
Fig. 4-874
Fig. 4-875
Fig. 4-876
Fig. 4-877
(4) Disconnect 2 connectors.
Fig. 4-878
Fig. 4-879
Fig. 4-880
(6) Take off the intermediate transport unit [1].
Fig. 4-881
Fig. 4-882
Fig. 4-883
(3) Release the latch and take off the DSDF
read-in sensor-1 [3] from the sensor bracket.
(4) Release the latch and take off the DSDF
read-in sensor-2 [4] from the sensor bracket.
Fig. 4-884
Fig. 4-885
Fig. 4-886
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latch
and take off the DSDF exit sensor [8].
Fig. 4-887
Fig. 4-888
Fig. 4-890
Fig. 4-891
Fig. 4-892
Fig. 4-893
Fig. 4-894
Fig. 4-895
Fig. 4-896
Fig. 4-897
(3) Disconnect the connector. Release the latch
and take off the DSDF shading sheet HP
sensor [12] from the sensor bracket.
(4) Disconnect the connector. Release the latch
and take off the DSDF lower cover opening/
closing detection sensor [13] from the sensor
bracket.
Fig. 4-898
Fig. 4-899
(3) Take off the DSDF-CCD module [1].
Fig. 4-900
DSDF-CCD module
Fig. 4-901
Fig. 4-902
Fig. 4-1
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the connector
cover [1].
[1]
Fig. 4-2
(4) Disconnect the interface cable [2] of the
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF).
[2]
Fig. 4-3
(5) Remove 2 fixing screws on the rear side.
Fig. 4-4
Fig. 4-5
(7) Lift the Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) and
take it off from the slide rail.
Fig. 4-6
[1]
Fig. 4-7
(3) Separate the finisher from the equipment.
Fig. 4-8
(4) Remove 3 screws and then take off the guide
rail from the finisher.
Fig. 4-9
[1]
Fig. 4-10
(3) Separate the finisher from the equipment.
Fig. 4-11
Notes:
If MJ-1112 is used, separate the finisher and
then pull out the saddle stitch unit.
Fig. 4-12
(4) Take off the cover.
Fig. 4-13
4
Fig. 4-14
(6) Remove 1 harness clamp. Release the
harness from 4 harness clamps.
Fig. 4-15
(7) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-16
(8) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 4-17
Fig. 4-18
5.1 Overview
This equipment consists of two servicing menus whose start-up method differs. Setting and adjustment
can be performed by entering into a mode such as [05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] or [49 Firmware Update]
from each menu.
• FS Menu
Mode Contents
03 TEST MODE Checks the status of input/output signals.
04 TEST PRINT MODE Outputs the test patterns.
05 ADJUSTMENT MODE Adjusts various items. 5
08 SETTING MODE Sets various items.
20 PM SUPPORT MODE Clears each counter.
30 LIST PRINT MODE Prints various lists or outputs them in a CSV format.
FAX 11 FAX CLEAR MODE Sets the fax board.
12 FAX LIST PRINT MODE
Outputs the contents set for the fax functions.
13 FAX FUNCTION MODE Sets the fax functions.
19 RAM EDIT MODE This is the mode for the special settings. (This is not used
generally.)
35 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE MODE This function backs up or restores the data.
36 CLONING Creates and installs clone files.
37 LICENSE MANAGEMENT Manages the license of applications.
• HS Menu
Mode Contents
01 Control Panel Check Checks various contents regarding the LCD, LED, hard
keys and digital keys on the control panel.
49 Firmware Update Performs firmware update with a USB storage device.
59 SRAM Data Cloning Backs up the SRAM data to a USB storage device.
73 Firmware Assist Clears error flags, or safely deletes data in the HDD to
support the replacement of the SYS board, SRAM or HDD.
74 HDD Assist Assists the Security HDD by checking the type of the
mounted HDD or removing keys.
75 File System Recovery Checks, recovers or initializes the file system (HDD).
76 SRAM Maintenance Recovers the equipment from particular errors such as
F800 or F900.
* Only the modes which are available for this equipment are displayed on each menu.
To cancel the modes, which can be entered from [HS Menu], press the [ON/OFF] button for a few
seconds to shut down the equipment.
5
Authentication Authentication
Warming up
screen screen
FS Menu HS Menu
[POWER] OFF
To user
Fig.5-1
* Be sure to cancel the self-diagnostic mode before customers start using the equipment.
Example
FS-08-1234-56
Menu symbol
Mode symbol
Code
Sub code
Fig.5-2
[A] FS Menu
[05 ADJUSTMENT MODE] or [08 SETTING MODE]:
[FS-05-1234-56] or [Performs FS-05-1234-56] is taken for explanation purposes.
(1) Start FS Menu by pressing the [ON/OFF] button while pushing the [FUNCTION CLEAR] and
[START] buttons simultaneously.
Fig.5-3
Fig.5-4
(4) By using the digital keys displayed on the screen, enter [1], [2], [3], [4] and then press the
[START] button. Enter the sub codes [5] and [6] and then press the [START] button.
(5) Carry out the adjustment by following the instructions displayed on the screen or press the
[START] button.
Example:
[FS-03-F:OFF-9-A]: Turn OFF all of the [F] keys in the FS-03 mode, select [9] and then [A].
[FS-03-F1:ON-9-A]: Turn ON the [F1] key in the FS-03 mode, select [9] and then [A].
[FAX]:
In case of [FS-11], [FS-12] or [FS-13] is given in the explanations, select [FAX] in the [FS Menu] and
then press [NEXT] to choose each mode.
Fig.5-5
Example:
[FS-08-8911:3]: "3" is set for FS-08-8911.
5.3.1 Overview
Each mode of the self-diagnostic codes can be used by selecting the keyword of the screen in the
Service UI.
The codes which are used frequently can be selected in the Service UI.
The Service UI can be used in the following modes in the FS Menu.
• 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE
• 08 SETTING MODE
Notes:
Not all codes can be used in the Service UI.
For the codes available with the Service UI, refer to the "Self-diagnostic code list" (separate
document).
5
Fig.5-6
* When "3" is set for FS-08-8911 (security mode), the authentication screen is always displayed.
Notes:
• The service password needs to be changed to log in for the first time.
• In case the password is forgotten, ask the administrator to reset the service password.
• Note that the user data are deleted at that time.
Fig.5-7
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
Procedure 2
Procedure 3
Procedure 4
[START]
* To perform the fax line 2 modem test or CML test, press [F2] to switch the line mode. (By
pressing [F2], the line mode is switched between line1 and line 2.)
Refer to the "Self-diagnostic code list" (separate document) for the codes available in the [03 TEST
MODE].
<Operation procedure>
[F1]
[F2]
[FS] [03] [START] or [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[F3] (Exit)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
Notes:
• When the [START] button is pressed, the equipment enters the input check mode and the
following screen appears.
• "100%" is displayed on the input check mode ready screen. "C%" is displayed when [F1] is
turned ON. "F%" is displayed when [F2] is turned ON. "S%" is displayed when [F3] is turned ON.
• The PRINT DATA lamp blinks when the input check is running.
Fig.5-8
Refer to the "Self-diagnostic code list" (separate document) for the items to be checked and the
condition of the equipment when [A] through [H] are highlighted.
Refer to the "Self-diagnostic code list" (separate document) for the codes available in the [03 TEST MODE].
<Operation procedure>
[ 1 ] Print out
[POWER]
[FS] [30] (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] OFF/ON
101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to (Exit)
102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
108: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
110: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
111: Version list
114: Total counter list
121: (05) adjustment value difference
122: (08) setting value difference
125: Apprication list (Maximum 100 items)
[POWER]
[FS] [30] Connect (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] Disconnect OFF/ON
USB 201: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to USB (Exit)
202: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed
(Code)
203: PM support mode
204: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
205: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
206: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
208: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
210: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
211: Version list
212: Engine firmware log * Manufacture Purpose Only
214: Total counter list
221: (05) adjustment value difference
222: (08) setting value difference
223: Job log / Message log
224: FAX function code (13) data list
225: Application list (Maximum 100 items)
300: ALL CSV files
Notes:
Precautions when storing information into USB device
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB device, be sure to obtain
permission from a user in advance.
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB device, the information is
printed out in a CSV format. Handle and manage the information with extra care.
• Do not lose or leak the setting information of the equipment.
• Do not use the setting information of the equipment for purposes other than maintenance or
product services.
• Provide the information promptly if a user requires so.
• The buttons on the control panel keep blinking while data are being stored in the USB device.
Do not disconnect the USB device while data are being stored.
List code
Lists
Printout CSV file output
Adjustment mode (05) data list 101 201
Setting mode (08) data list 102 202
PM support mode data list 103 203
Pixel counter list
104 204
(toner cartridge reference)
Pixel counter list
105 205
(service call reference)
Error history list 106 206
(Maximum 1000 items) (Maximum 1000 items)
Error history list 107
-
(Latest 80 items)
Firmware upgrade log 108 208
(Maximum 200 items) (Maximum 200 items)
Power ON/OFF log 110 210
(Maximum 100 items) (Maximum 100 items)
Version list 111 211
Engine firmware log - 212
Total counter list 114 214
(05) adjustment value difference 121 221
(08) setting value difference 122 222
Application list 125 225
(Maximum 100 items) (Maximum 100 items)
Job log/Message log - 223
FAX Function mode (13) data list - 224
Output all CSV files - 300 *
*: (05) adjustment value difference and (08) setting value difference are not output.
Fig.5-9
The selected adjustment codes and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list.
Fig.5-10
The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list.
100, , 0
101, , 1
102, , 2
103, , 3
104, , 4
105, , 5
106, , 6
107, , 7
108, , 8
109, , 9
110, , 0
111, , 1
112, , 2
Fig.5-11
The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list.
• 20 PM SUPPORT MODE
Fig.5-12
The number of pages currently output (OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the recommended
number of output pages for PM (PM OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the current drive count
(DRIVE COUNTS) and the recommended drive count for PM (PM DRIVE COUNTS) are output
together with PM units. Use this list for confirming the PM units to be replaced at each PM. See the
following page for PM:
P. 7-1 "7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)"
TONERCARTRIDGE
Fig.5-13
Pixel counter data (toner cartridge reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
P. 5-51 "5.19 Pixel Counter"
SERVICEMAN
Fig.5-14
Pixel counter data (service call reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
P. 5-51 "5.19 Pixel Counter"
Fig.5-15
The error history is output. See the following page for the parameters for each error:
P. 8-55 "8.2.4 Printer function error"
FW UPGRADE LOG
S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
USER ROM/VERSION DATE TOTAL COPY(B) COPY(2) COPY(C) PRINT(B) PRINT(2) PRINT(C) LIST FAX STATUS
Service Txxxxxxx-xxxx 20xx-xx-xx 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 OK
Service Txxxxxxx-xxxx 20xx-xx-xx 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 OK
Service Txxxxxxx-xxxx 20xx-xx-xx 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 OK
Fig.5-16
Item Content
USER User who updated firmware
ROM/VERSION Version of firmware
DATE Date that firmware was updated
TOTAL Total counter data when firmware was updated
COPY (B) Copier counter data (black) when firmware was updated
COPY (2) Copier counter data (twin color) when firmware was updated
COPY (C) Copier counter data (full color) when firmware was updated
PRINT (B) Printer counter data (black) when firmware was updated
PRINT (2) Printer counter data (twin color) when firmware was updated
PRINT (C) Printer counter data (full color) when firmware was updated
LIST List print counter data when firmware was updated
FAX Fax print counter data when firmware was updated
STATUS Result of update
Fig.5-17
Item Content
DATE Date that the power was turned ON or OFF
TIME Time that the power was turned ON or OFF
FUNCTION Whether the power was turned ON or OFF, or if it was turned
ON or OFF with a remote reset function
TOTAL Total counter data when the power was turned OFF and then
back ON
VERSION LIST
S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
Fig.5-18
ENGINE FW LOG
20xx/xx/xx xx:xx
TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx
Cxxxxxxxx
FIN S/N-xxxxxxxx
TOTAL, 9999999, DF TOTAL, 9999999
CODE SUB DATA
4624 0 0
4624 1 0
4624 2 58
4624 3 3
4624 4 58
4624 5 3
4624 6 0
4624 7 56
4624 8 3
4624 9 0
4624 10 41
4624 11 1
4624 12 29
4624 13 7
4624 14 0
4624 15 0
4624 16 0
4624 17 0
4624 18 0
4624 19 0
4624 20 0
Fig.5-19
The file of the engine firmware log is output (but it is not printed out).
TOTAL COUNTER LIST S/N: xxxxxxxxx FIN S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL : 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL : 9999999
PRINT COUNTER
COPY FAX PRINTER LIST TOTAL
SMALL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
LARGE xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
TOTAL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
SCAN COUNTER
TOTAL 5
FULL COLOR BLACK TOTAL
COPY xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
FAX xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
NETWORK xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
TOTAL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
COPY
FULL COLOR BLACK TOTAL
SMALL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
LARGE xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
TOTAL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
FAX
FULL COLOR BLACK TOTAL
SMALL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
LARGE xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
TOTAL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
NETWORK
FULL COLOR BLACK TOTAL
SMALL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
LARGE xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
TOTAL xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx
CALIBRATION COUNTER :0
Fig.5-20
05 DIFFERENCE LIST
S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999
Fig.5-21
The value differences between the factory default and the current value of [05 Adjustment mode]
and [08 Setting mode] in the FS Menu can be printed or output with a CSV file.
The mark "*" or "+" will be added to the left side of the code in the following cases.
"*": If there is a difference
"+": If there is no backed up value
Notes:
• Back-up data of the factory default are automatically created when the automatic gamma
adjustment of the easy set-up mode has been completed during the unpacking and setting up of
the equipment. The back-up file will be retained even if the system firmware is upgraded.
However, the file will be deleted when the HDD is formatted or replaced.
• When the easy set-up mode is restarted while a specified value such as 4 through 9 is set for
FS-08-9022 (Production process management status for easy setup), the back-up file stored
during unpacking and setting-up is deleted after the completion of the automatic gamma
adjustment and a new one is created while the value as of then is stored.
• When no back-up file exists
When FS-30-121 (122) is performed, the equipment returns to the ready state of the 30 LIST
PRINT MODE without performing printing.
When FS-30-221 (222) is performed, the equipment returns to the ready state of the 30 LIST
PRINT MODE and the error message "The file cannot be saved." appears on the panel.
Notes:
The data automatically received during the self-diagnostic mode are sometimes not printed.
Therefore, be sure to disconnect the modular code form the line connector (LINE1, LINE2) of the
equipment before starting the self-diagnostic mode. After the equipment is released from the
self-diagnostic mode, reconnect the modular code.
5
5.10.1 11 FAX CLEAR MODE
(1) Select [FAX] in the FS Menu and press [NEXT]. Select [11 FAX CLEAR MODE] and press
[NEXT].
Fig.5-22
Fig.5-23
• Memory Areas
- User registration area (SRAM)
ID registration area
Home position
- Image data area (HDD, SRAM)
Transmission file
Reception file
Image data file management area
F-code box information
- System setting area (NVRAM)
Settings in the [13 FAX FUNCTION MODE] Areas 100 - 999
5
<Operation procedure>
(1) Press [CUSTOM INITIALZE].
Fig.5-24
(1) Select [FAX] in the FS Menu and press [NEXT]. Select [12 FAX LIST PRINT MODE] and press
[NEXT].
Fig.5-25
This function can save (back up) a back-up file of the MFP setting data in a USB media or external
server, or can restore the stored (backed up) file into the equipment.
(1) Select [35 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE MODE] in the FS Menu and press [NEXT].
Fig.5-26
Fig.5-27
(3) Select [Data Backup] or [Data Restore] and press [Next]. Press [USB Media].
(4) Insert a USB storage device into the equipment and press [OK]. Backing up or restoring of the
data starts.
Tips:
For details, refer to the “HDD Data Back-up/Restore Instruction Manual” (separate document).
Each icon
B ・Checking of the hard keys Checking of the LCD display
・Checking of the digital keys
[HOME]
[Back] [Next]
Fig.5-28
Tips:
• By touching the screen or pressing any hard key, the screen is shifted to the hard key
confirmation screen.
5.14.3 Checking of the LCD display, hard keys and digital keys
Tips:
• The screen is returned to this one when the [HOME] button is pressed on each screen.
The following table shows each text and performance when the key is pressed.
5.14.4 Checking of the LCD touch sensor and USB storage device
connection
The screen is shifted to the LCD touch sensor and USB storage device confirmation screen by your
pressing [NEXT] in the LCD display confirmation screen.
5.15.1 Overview
This mode enables you to operate the HDD partition, formatting SRAM data, delete the HDD/SRAM
data and backup/restore the encryption key and license.
The Functions in this mode are below.
Functions Content
Clear Software Update Error Flag Clearing update error flag
Format Root Partition Formatting data storage partition
Format HDD Creating HDD partition
Key Backup/Restore Backing up/restoring encryption key and license
Erase HDD Securely Erasing HDD securely 5
Clear Service Tech Password Clearing service password
Disable Fast boot Disabling faster start
Clear SRAM Formatting SRAM data
Erase SRAM Securely Erasing SRAM securely
Format HDD Without Key Generation Create HDD partition without having upgraded
the key
HDD Data Restore Performing formatting, backup data restoring and
firmware upgrading in series
Fig.5-29
[A] Clearing update error flag (Clear Software Update Error Flag)
Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may accidentally
start up and an F600 error occurs when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the Update
Error flags used in the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically
cleared in the download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of SRAM, the flags are
cleared with this function.
[D] Backing up/restoring encryption key and license (Key Backup Restore)
When the SRAM or the SYS board is replaced or initialized, the encryption key and license are erased.
Therefore, they need to be backed up or restored with this function.
Fig.5-30
Fig.5-31
MEDIUM
This overwriting method is more secure than LOW. The erasing time is between LOW and HIGH.
"00-FF-Random" three times repeatedly -Verify
HIGH
This is the most secure overwriting method. It takes the longest time to erase data.
"00-FF-Random" five times repeatedly -Verify
© 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5 - 35
SIMPLE
This is the simple overwriting method. It takes the shortest time to erase data.
Overwrite the Random data once
* Faster start: The start-up method which can shorten the time for starting by approx. 5 seconds by
starting up the equipment in the normal mode or while selecting the menu from the exclusive file.
(There is no effect on the recovery from hibernation.)
Once the power is turned ON while the [HOME], [RESET] and [START] buttons are pressed
simultaneously, a file for faster start is created and it becomes available. It will take approx. 3
minutes to create a file for faster start. When the file creation is completed, the equipment will
automatically start in the normal mode.
(1) Install the USB storage device with the backup data stored in the equipment.
(2) Install the USB storage device with the backup data stored in the equipment.
• Format the HDD and restore the backup data.
• If the firmware standard package is stored in this USB storage device, continuously upgrade
the firmware.
• If the firmware standard package is not stored in this USB storage device, an error appears.
In such a case, install the USB storage device with the firmware standard package stored in
the equipment and press [OK]. Firmware upgrading will start.
• After upgrading is completed, reboot the equipment.
5.16.1 Overview
This mode is available only when the security HDD (Secure HDD) is mounted in the equipment. It
enables you to check the type of the mounted HDD, revert the Secure HDD to the factory default.
Fig.5-32
Notes:
When "Normal HDD" is displayed, items 1 and 2 are not selectable.
If you select any of 1 and 2 and press the [START] button, the error message “Operation Failed.
Press SoftPower Key to Switch Off.” appears.
Fig.5-33
Fig.5-34
5.17.1 Overview
This is a mode to check if there is any damage to the file system (HDD) and recover it if necessary. Use
this mode only in the following cases.
• There is a possibility of damage to the file system (HDD).
• There is an apparent damage to the file system (HDD), requiring recovery or initialization.
Functions Content
Check F/S Checks the file system.
Recovery F/S Recovers the file system. 5
Initialize HDD Initializes partitions in the HDD.
Initialize DB Initializes database (LDAP DB / log DB / language DB / AppMgmt
DB / HomeScreen DB / JobHistory DB / AppLicense DB).
SMART Info Displays the various information in the HDD.
DISK Info Displays the usage rate of HDD.
HDD Utility Initializes log files.
Fig.5-35
Notes:
• Do not turn the power OFF with the [MAIN POWER] button after the processing has started
(while the processing is being performed).
• After the processing is completed, a beep sounds 4 times and either "Completed" or "Failed"
appears on the screen.
Fig.5-36
Fig.5-37
Fig.5-38
Notes:
• If initialization is carried out by selecting [ALL] or [/encryption], applications and OS data in the
equipment are also initialized. In this case, the applications and the file system must be
reinstalled. Install the system software (HD DATA) by performing [49] [4] after initialization.
• If [ALL] is selected, minimal data necessary for normal startup are automatically recovered.
• If initialization is carried out by selecting [ALL], the log database is also initialized. Back up the
data before initializing if necessary.
• If [ALL] is selected, do not perform SRAM data formatting (Clear SRAM) before the normal
start-up.
Fig.5-39
Fig.5-40
Tips:
NAV: Normalized Attribute Value
Indicates the value of the specified HDD condition as compared to the manufacturer's optimum
value.
Worst: Worst Ever Normalized Attribute Value
Indicates the worst value of NAV permitted by the manufacturer.
Notes:
The values of NAV and Worst should be treated as a rough reference since their basis may differ
depending on the specification of HDD manufacturers.
Fig.5-41
5.18.1 Overview
This is a mode in which you can clear particular errors such as F800 or F900.
The processing contents of this mode are the same as those for [Clear SRAM] in [HS-73].
Fig.5-42
Notes:
• [Turn Line Mode ON] or [Turn Line Mode OFF] starts once each icon is pressed.
• When [Reset Date and Time] or [SRAM Re-Initialize] is pressed, the confirmation screen
appears.
Fig.5-43
5.19.1 Outline
[ 1 ] Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by writing light source and converts it
into the print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called
Pixel count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
However, since some of the factors in "2" below are not taken into account by the pixel counter, its
accuracy does sometimes not match the actual toner consumption.
5
[ 2 ] Factors affecting toner consumption
Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under the
condition that the data of print ratio 5% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output pages
per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (writing light source never emit.)
Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (writing light source emit to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (writing light source never emit.)
Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (writing light source emit to all pixels.)
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
X/2
X/10
5% 12% 60%
Pixel count (%)
Fig.5-45 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are
pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual,
turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the FS-08-6505.)
TONERCARTRIDGE
SERVICEMAN
Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed (FS-08-6576).
[ 1 ] Setting files
An encrypted file in which the setting values for each code to be changed is written in an XML format.
A maximum of 100 codes can be set in one file. If a code has sub codes, each of them is counted as
one code.
File name: DIG_SET.diag
File format: xml format
Notes:
• A setting file has to be encrypted by a dedicated encryption tool to be stored in a USB storage
device.
• A setting file has to be located in the root folder of a USB storage device.
• No other automatic execution script has to be located in the root folder of a USB storage
device.
[ 2 ] Example
<Policy>
<Data>
<Category-05/>
<Category-08>
<Code>
<MainCode>8724</MainCode>
<Value>1</Value>
</Code>
<Code>
<MainCode>9240</MainCode>
<Value>2</Value>
</Code>
<Code>
<MainCode>9264</MainCode>
<SubCode>1</SubCode>
© 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5 - 59
<Value>1</Value>
</Code>
</Category-08>
<Category-13/>
</Data>
</Policy>
Notes:
• The setting value of the code in step 10 is written by inserting a comma to divide the values.
E.g.: 08-4106 <Value>128,128</Value>
• Setting is carried out in order of written.
• The read-only codes and the execution codes are skipped to continue the processing if they
are included.
• Even if writing of the setting value has failed, the processing will not stop and writing into the
setting file will continue to its end.
After the processing has been completed, the result of writing of all codes is stored in a result
file and then a message indicating partial success will be displayed.
• Storing of a result file is not desired, add "<ResultFile>false</ResultFile>" under "<Policy>".
Example
<Policy>
<ResultFile>false</ResultFile>
<Data>
<Category-05/>
<Category-08>
<Code>
<MainCode>8724</MainCode>
<Value>1</Value>
</Code>
[ 1 ] Result files
A file in which success or failure of the replacement of the setting values for each code included in the
setting files is written. A result file is stored in a USB storage device after this code is performed.
File name: DIG_ RESULT_XXXX_yymmddhhmmss.xml (XXXX: Serial No.)
File format: xml format
[ 2 ] Example
<Policy>
<Data>
<Category-05/>
<Category-08>
<Code>
<MainCode>8724</MainCode>
<RESULT>SUCCESS</RESULT>
</Code>
<Code>
<MainCode>9240</MainCode>
<RESULT>FAILED</RESULT>
</Code>
<Code>
<MainCode>9264</MainCode>
<SubCode>1</SubCode>
<RESULT>UNSPECIFIED</RESULT>
</Code>
</Category-08>
<Category-13/>
</Data>
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A © 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5 - 60
</Policy>
* SUCCESS Values are updated successfully.
* FAILED Update of values fails.
* UNSPECIFIED No codes written exist.
A value to be set is outside the assignable range.
Notes:
• A result file is stored in the root folder of a USB storage device.
• As for the codes whose values have been altered caused by batch setting of another one,
their items, such as the code number, value changed and success/failure of the change, are
not described in a result file.
• In case an unavailable code for writing is included in the setting file, the processing will
continue and then a message indicating partial success will be displayed after the setting of
all codes has been completed. Unavailable codes for writing are displayed in the list by
pressing [View]. When [OK] is pressed on the screen of the message indicating partial
success or the list screen, the display is returned to the BASIC screen.
Setting
100 % 3673
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX.diag
001
001
Return OK Cancel
Fig.5-50
5. Press [OK].
6. Setting for all codes included in the setting file are completed, the BASIC screen of the 08 mode
appears.
7. Remove the USB storage device.
6. SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the image quality if necessary. Chapter 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5
230% 2400 A3
[FS-05-2400] [START] TEST MODE
128 128
C A
Fig.6-2
Notes:
• A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output. Press the Up or Down button
to change the value.
• B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
• C indicates the latest adjustment value.
(3) After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.
230% 2400 A3
TEST MODE WAIT
128 128
Fig.6-3
(4) After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows.
240% 2400 A3
ADJUSTMENT MODE
128 150
A
Fig.6-4
(5) Check if the value B is within the range of 234 to 246 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner
sensor is 2.34 V to 2.46 V).
Up Increased Increased
100% A A3
[OK] TEST MODE
6
Fig.6-5
(3) When performing “Automatic gamma adjustment” in cases no parts written above are replaced,
do the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742)” procedure before
“Automatic gamma adjustment”.
<Other abnormalities>
Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.
P. 8-1 "8. ERROR CODE and TROUBLESHOOTING"
1. Paper alignment at the registration roller 4100, 4101, 4103, 4104, 4105,
4106, 4107,4108, 4109, 4111,
4115, 4116, 4117, 4118, 4119,
4120, 4110, 4119, 4128, 4129,
4580, 4581, 4582, 4583, 4584,
4585, 4586, 4588, 4589, 4590,
4591, 4592, 4593, 4601, 4602,
4603, 4604, 4615
FS
100% A A3
TEST MODE
POWER
[05]
Code No.
1
Digital keys : Key in codes. 100% XXX A3
TEST MODE
START YYY ZZZ Adjustment value newly keyed in.
(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
Current adjustment value
Digital keys : Key in adjustment
values.
( CLEAR Use to make corrections) 100% A A3
TEST MODE
OK Value ZZZ is stored
replacing values YYY.
TEST COPY
Test copy 100% A A3
START Wait Warming Up
If the test copy does not
satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and
repeat the adjustment
FS Menu
procedure. 100% A A3
COPYING
Fig.6-6
Fig.6-7
Fig.6-8
Fig.6-9
Fig.6-10
Paper size
Drawer Code Sub code (Select the paper size Paper type
with the sub code.)
1st drawer 4100 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0: 330 mm or longer Plain paper, Thick paper
(CST1) 4115 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 (13.0 inches or Thick paper 1
longer)
4582 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 1: 220–329 mm Thick paper 2
4588 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 (8.7–12.9 inches) Thick paper 3
2nd drawer 4101 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 2: 205–219 mm Plain paper, Thick paper
(CST2) (8.1–8.6 inches)
4116 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 3: 160-204 mm Thick paper 1
4583 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 (6.3–8.0 inches) Thick paper 2
4589 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 4: 159 mm or shorter Thick paper 3
(6.26 inches or
3rd drawer 4108 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 shorter) Plain paper, Thick paper
(CST3) 4117 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 1
4584 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 2 6
4590 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 3
4th drawer 4109 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Plain paper, Thick paper
(CST4) 4118 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 1
4585 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 2
4591 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 3
Bypass feed 4103 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Plain paper, Thick paper
4104 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 1
4105 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 2
4106 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 3
4107 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 OHP
4128 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Special paper 1
4129 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Special paper 2
4601 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 4
Tandem LCF 4119 0 - Thick paper 1
1 - Thick paper 2
2 - Thick paper 3
4111 - - Plain paper
Option LCF 4580 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 0: 330 mm or longer Plain paper, Thick paper
4581 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 (13.0 inches or Thick paper 1
longer)
4586 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 1: 220-329 mm Thick paper 2
4592 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 (8.7-12.9 inches) Thick paper 3
ADU 4110 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 2: 205-219 mm Plain paper, Thick paper
(8.1-8.6 inches)
4120 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 3: 160-204 mm Thick paper 1
4593 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 (6.3-8.0 inches) Thick paper 3
4: 159 mm or shorter
4602 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 4
(6.26 inches or
4603 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 shorter) Special paper 1
4604 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Special paper 2
4615 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Thick paper 2
*Weight:
Plain: 60 to 80 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond to 22 lb. Bond)
Thick: 81 to 105 g/m2 (22 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Thick 1: 106 to 163 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover (90 lb. Index))
Thick 2: 164 to 209 g/m2 (61 lb. Cover to 77.3 lb. Cover (115.7 lb. Index))
Thick 3: 210 to 256 g/m2 (140 lb. Index)
Thick 4: 257 to 280 g/m2 (150 lb. Index)
© 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-9
(1) Perform the test print according to the following procedure.
<Procedure>
[POWER]
[OK] [Drawer [ ]*1+[TEST PRINT]
Stores in memory selection] OFF/ON
(Test print) (Exit)
Fig.6-11
Fig.6-12
(3) Perform the same procedure for all paper sources.
Notes:
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration
section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge
position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while
confirming the leading edge position is not shifted.
1 21
A
6
B, E
6
2
D, F
Feeding direction
6
C
22
Adjustment
Detail of adjustment Chart
Tolerance
A 200 ± 0.5mm P. 6-13 "[A] Reproduction ratio of the primary scanning direction" 05-98
B 52 ± 0.5mm P. 6-13 "[B] Primary scanning data writing start position"
C 200 ± 0.5mm P. 6-14 "[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine
adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed)"
D 52 ± 0.5mm P. 6-15 "[D] Secondary scanning data writing start position"
E 52 ± 0.5mm P. 6-16 "[E] Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing" 05-3
F 52 ± 0.5mm P. 6-17 "[F] Secondary scanning data writing start position at duplexing"
Simplex D
Feeding direction
1 Page
C
Duplex D F
B E
A
Feeding direction
1 Page
2 Page
ADU
CST
Adjustment
Detail of adjustment Chart
Tolerance
A 4.2 ± 0.5mm P. 6-13 "[A] Reproduction ratio of the primary scanning direction" 05-315
B 4.2 ± 0.5mm P. 6-13 "[B] Primary scanning data writing start position"
C 4.2 ± 0.5mm P. 6-14 "[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine
adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed)"
D 4.2 ± 0.5mm P. 6-15 "[D] Secondary scanning data writing start position"
E 4.2 ± 0.5mm P. 6-16 "[E] Primary scanning data writing start position at duplexing" 05-316
F 4.2 ± 0.5mm P. 6-17 "[F] Secondary scanning data writing start position at duplexing"
When the value of the sub code "0" of FS-05-4526 is adjusted, those for "1" to "4" are also
automatically changed in accordance with an appropriate parameter, along with the adjusted value.
Notes:
1. The setting value specified in FS-05-4526-0 is reflected to the charts printed out by FS-05-98,
FS-05-3, FS-05-315 and FS-05-316.
2. When “FS-05-4526-0” is performed, a proper value is automatically calculated for the size of
an image in each function mode (copy/printer/Fax) or at each speed (normal speed/reduced
speed). The speed of the transfer belt motor is also adjusted. Therefore, use the above
default value other than the sub code “0,” unless otherwise required.
A Feeding direction B
Step 1
Feeding direction
C D
Step 2
Fig.6-15
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Press [TEST COPY] [START] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper.
(3) Key in [3033] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.
(4) Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2.
Step 1
In case of A:
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (Rear) [1]
(CW).
In case of B:
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw (Rear) [1]
(CCW).
Fig.6-16
Fig.6-17
(5) Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)
• Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond 6
Product name: 1401E
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
(3) Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100% and the 2nd drawer.
(4) Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
<Procedure>
FS-05-4000 [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press [OK] (stored in the memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the
distance A become.(approx. 0.1 mm/step)
250
200
A
100
50
Feeding direction
Fig.6-18
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.
(3) Press [TEST COPY] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd
drawer.
(4) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
<Procedure>
FS-05-3030 [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press [OK] (stored in the memory). 6
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value is, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance
B becomes narrower. (approx. 0.0423 mm/step)
Feeding direction
Fig.6-19
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [TEST COPY] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd
drawer.
(4) Measure the distance C from 200 mm to 400 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps (3) to (5) above.
<Procedure>
FS-05-3032 [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 63 to 193))
Press [OK] (stored in the memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value is, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes. (approx.
0.018%/step)
Copied image of the ruler
Feeding direction
Fig.6-20
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [TEST COPY] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd
drawer.
(4) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
<Procedure>
FS-05-3031 [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 90 to 166)) 6
Press [OK] (stored in the memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.08 mm/
step).
10 20 30 40
Feeding direction
Fig.6-21
(3) Press [TEST COPY] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and
the 2nd drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 4.2 ± 0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
<Procedure>
FS-05-4050 [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press [OK] (stored in the memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
Feeding direction
Fig.6-22
(3) Press [TEST COPY] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and
the 2nd drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 4.2 ± 1.0 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
<Procedure>
FS-05-4052 [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press [OK] (stored in the memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.) 6
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig.6-23
(3) Press [TEST COPY] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and
the 2nd drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 4.2 ± 1.0 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
<Procedure>
FS-05-4053 [START]
(Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press [OK] (stored in the memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig.6-24
(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this
adjustment:
• Photoconductive drum • Developer material • Laser optical unit
• Transfer roller • Drum cleaning blade
• Main charger grid • SRAM
(2) Be sure to perform this adjustment whenever HDD data are cleared.
<Procedure>
7114 7116 7115 7134 Manual density mode The larger the value is, the
center value darker the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to
255 (Default: 128)
7123 7125 7124 7137 Automatic density The larger the value is, the
mode darker the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
7190-0 7192-0 7191-0 7189-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density
of the item to be adjusted becomes
7190-1 7192-1 7191-1 7189-1 Medium density darker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
7190-2 7192-2 7191-2 7189-2 High density (Default: 128)
Notes:
• Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density
and high density range will become slightly darker.
6
<Procedure>
7100 7102 7101 7106 Background adjustment The larger the value is, the darker
(Auto/Manual) the background becomes.
Acceptable values:0 to 255
7086 - - - Background adjustment (Default: 128)
(Only Manual)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
Notes:
To check an image of [User Custom], use the one copied in the normal startup.
7056 7058 7057 7249 Sharpness adjustment The larger the value is, the sharper
the image becomes; while the
smaller the value is, the softer the
image becomes. The smaller the
value is, the less moire tends to
appear.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
Notes:
To check an image of [User Custom], use the one copied in the normal startup.
7097 7098 7252 Adjustment of smudged When a larger value is set, black text becomes
text in black thinner. When a smaller value is set, it becomes
thicker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 2)
Notes:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet
the standard when the setting value is
changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
Notes:
To check an image of [User Custom], use the one copied in the normal startup.
Text/
Text Item to be adjusted Remarks
Photo
7218-0 7219-0 Emission level 0/4 The smaller the value is, the smaller the emission
7218-1 7219-1 Emission level 1/4 level becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is
reproduced accordingly.
7218-2 7219-2 Emission level 2/4 Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7218-3 7219-3 Emission level 3/4 (Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127,
7218-4 7219-4 Emission level 4/4 Level 3/4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1) Perform FS-05.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START].
(3) Key in a sub-code and press the [START].
(4) Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct a value once keyed in, press [CLEAR].)
(5) Press [OK] to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(6) Press [TEST COPY] and then press the [START] to make a test copy.
(7) If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (6).
Notes:
• Change the setting value increment of 8 as a guide.
• Be sure to confirm the image when the setting value is changed.
• The setting value must increase as the emission level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not
increase this order when setting the values.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
6
6.2.11 Background offsetting adjustment in back side for DSDF
(common for copy, scan and fax)
The background level for scanning the back side of originals with the DSDF can be adjusted when
there is a different background fogging level at the scanning of the back and front sides with the DSDF.
This is to adjust the level of the background image removed when the scanning of the back side of the
original with the DSDF is performed.
The adjustment value is applied to both the front and back sides.
< 05 Adjustment Mode >
Color mode Code Remarks
Common 7024 The larger the adjustment value, the darker the background becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
7151 7152 7153 7150 Scan noise When the value decreases, the effect of reducing
reduction streaks becomes larger.
When the value increases, the effect of reducing
streaks becomes smaller.
When "0" is set, this function is disabled.
Acceptable values: 0 to 200
(Default: 100)
Notes:
If too small a value is set, the text may not
be printed clearly.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
Notes:
To check an image of [User Custom], use the one copied in the normal startup.
(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this
adjustment:
• Photoconductive drum • Developer material • Laser optical unit
• Transfer roller • Drum cleaning blade
• Main charger grid • SRAM
(2) Be sure to perform this adjustment whenever HDD data are cleared.
<Procedure>
600dpi 7315-0 7316-0 7317-0 7318-0 7319-0 7320-0 Low The larger the
density value is, the
7315-1 7316-1 7317-1 7318-1 7319-1 7320-1 Medium density of the
density item to be
adjusted
7315-2 7316-2 7317-2 7318-2 7319-2 7320-2 High
becomes
density
darker.
1200dpi 7309-0 7310-0 - - - - Low Acceptable
density values: 0 to
7309-1 7310-1 - - - - Medium 255
density (Default: 128)
7309-2 7310-2 - - - - High
density
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-36 "6.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-40 "6.3.8 Adjustment of smudged text in black".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-32 "6.2.8 Emission level adjustment".
Notes:
• Change the setting value increment of 8 as a guide.
• Be sure to confirm the image when the setting value is changed.
• The setting value must increase as the emission level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do
not increase this order when setting the values.
Effective range
Code Remarks
8243-0 The effective range (lower limit) of the density adjustment for the line in Black can be set.
Acceptable value: 0 to 255 (Default: 1)
8243-1 The effective range (upper limit) of the density adjustment for the line in Black can be set. 6
Acceptable value: 0 to 255 (Default: 200)
Notes:
Be sure to set the values of the upper and lower limit properly so that they are not set in reverse.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-36 "6.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-40 "6.3.8 Adjustment of smudged text in black".
600dpi 7325 7326 7327 When a larger value is set, black text becomes thinner. When a
smaller value is set, it becomes thicker.
1200dpi 7305 - - Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 6)
<Procedure>
7485-0 7487-0 7480-0 7488-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
7485-1 7487-1 7480-1 7488-1 Medium density Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
7485-2 7487-2 7480-2 7488-2 High density 6
Notes:
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
(1) Perform FS-05.
(2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the sub code to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the [START]
button.
0: Red, 1: Green, 2: Blue
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (Acceptable values: 0 to 255)
(To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR].)
© 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 41
(5) Press [OK] to store the value in memory.
The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(6) Turn the power ON again. Scan an original and check the images.
(7) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6).
Original mode
Item to be adjusted Remarks
Text User
Text Photo
/Photo custom
8339 8340 8341 8380 Manual density center The larger the value is, the darker the image
value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
7444 7445 7446 7475 7447 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the image
center value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7456 7457 7458 7478 7459 Automatic density (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>:
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
(1) Perform FS-05.
(2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (Acceptable values: 0 to 255)
(To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR].)
(4) Press [OK] to store the value in memory.
The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(5) Turn the power ON again. Scan an original and check the images.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
Color 7026 The larger the adjustment value is, the darker the background
becomes.
Black 7025 The adjustment value is applied to both the front and back sides.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
(1) Performs FS-05.
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct a value once keyed in, press [CLEAR].)
(4) Press [OK] to store the value in memory. -> The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restart. Acquire the SlimPDF file and check it.
(6) If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
8413 8414 8415 8412 RADF scan noise When the value decreases, the effect of reducing
reduction streaks becomes larger.
When the value increases, the effect of reducing
streaks becomes smaller.
When "0" is set, this function is disabled.
Acceptable values: 0 to 200
(Default: 100)
Notes:
If too small a value is set, the text may not
be printed clearly.
Black
7401 7402 7403 7404 7400 RADF scan When the value decreases, the effect of
noise reducing streaks becomes larger.
reduction When the value increases, the effect of
reducing streaks becomes smaller.
When "0" is set, this function is disabled.
Acceptable values: 0 to 200
(Default: 100)
Notes:
If too small a value is set, the text
may not be printed clearly.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
<Confirmation>
If possible, perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the recipient's
side.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-32 "6.2.8 Emission level adjustment".
<Confirmation>
Check the emission level setting with the actual fax data received, if possible.
Notes:
• Change the setting value increment of 8 as a guide.
• Be sure to confirm the image when the setting value is changed.
• The setting value must increase as the emission level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not
increase this order when setting the values.
Color 7026 The larger the adjustment value is, the darker the background
becomes.
Black 7025 The adjustment value is applied to both the front and back sides.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-42 "6.4.3 Density adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of P. 6-28 "6.2.2 Density adjustment".
6
Fig.6-26
Fig.6-27
Fig.6-28
(3) Move the bracket.
Move to the direction A: The roller life will
become longer (but multiple feeding may
occur frequently).
Move to the direction B: Multiple feeding will
be suppressed (but the roller life may
become shorter).
Notes:
B A
The recommended moving distance of the
bracket is within 2 or 3 scale marks.
Fig.6-29
Fig.6-30
[1]
Fig.6-31
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the SFB lower
unit [1].
[1]
Fig.6-32
Fig.6-33
(5) Remove 1 screw from the round hole of the
front side bracket [1], and screw it
temporarily to an oblong hole.
[1]
Fig.6-34
(6) Move the front side bracket [1].
Move to the direction A: The roller life will
become longer (but multiple feeding may
occur frequently).
Move to the direction B: Multiple feeding will A B
be suppressed (but the roller life may
become shorter).
Notes: [1]
The recommended moving distance of the
bracket is within 1 or 2 scale marks.
(7) Tighten the screw that was temporarily
screwed.
Fig.6-35
Fig.6-36
(9) Move the rear side bracket [1].
Move to the direction A: The roller life will 6
become longer (but multiple feeding may
occur frequently).
Move to the direction B: Multiple feeding will B A
be suppressed (but the roller life may
become shorter).
Notes: [1]
The recommended moving distance of the
bracket is within 1 or 2 scale marks.
(10) Tighten the screw that was temporarily
screwed.
Fig.6-37
<Procedure>
Fig.6-38
(3) Lift up the drawer paper tray.
(4) Take off the drawer paper tray upward by
Drawer paper tray Stopper
releasing it from a stopper on the front side.
Fig.6-39
Fig.6-42
* Table of the adjustment combination of the gear holder and the side guide adjustment piece
1 mm
2 mm
3 mm
Fig.6-43
Fig.6-44
<Procedure>
(1) Take off the drawer.
Fig.6-45
(3) Set the side guide to the 12 inch mark.
Fig.6-46
(4) Loosen 2 screws.
(5) Move the side guide adjustment piece to the
rear and tighten the screws (by 0.5 mm).
Screw
0.5 mm
Fig.6-47
<Adjustment procedure>
6
Fig.6-48
Notes:
Doctor-sleeve gap jig
1. Flip up the protection sheet for the doctor
blade from the sleeve before inserting the
gauge. Also, be sure not to damage the
protection sheet.
Protection sheet
Fig.6-49
Doctor blade
Fig.6-50
Doctor blade
Fig.6-51
<Checking method>
Check the position of the lever assembly bracket of the transfer belt unit currently installed
The bracket can be assembled in the following three positions
1. Normal position
2. Pushed to the upper end (Rotate the bracket a half turn.)
3. Pushed to the lower end (Rotate the bracket a half turn.)
Normal Bracket Half turn
6
Upper Lower
Fig.6-52
Adjustment is not needed when the bracket position of the new unit or assembly is the same as that
of the unit before the replacement.
When the bracket position of the new unit or assembly is the same as that of the new one, align the
bracket to the installation position before the replacement.
Confirm the gap when the following parts are replaced or disassembled.
• Fuser belt
• Fuser belt lubricating sheet
• Fuser belt pad
• Pressure roller
Notes:
• Wait until the fuser unit is completely cooled down, and then start the adjustment.
• Place the fuser unit on a flat surface.
• Be sure not to damage the fuser belt with the gap adjustment jig.
• Adjust the gap while the pressure roller is contacted to the fuser belt.
• If the fuser unit is not installed to the equipment after the replacement or adjustment but must be
stored as a unit for a long time, be sure to leave the pressure roller released from the fuser belt.
[3] [4]
A ~ E: 0.55 - 0.8mm
[1] [2]
Fig.6-53
<Jig to be used>
Separation plate gap adjustment jig
Fig.6-54
[1]
Fig.6-55
6
[2]
Fig.6-56
(3) Adapt the fuser belt to the roller by rotating the gear [3] a few times in the direction of the arrow.
[3]
Fig.6-57
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
Front screw
Center screw
Rear screw
Fig.6-58
Notes:
• Wait until the fuser unit has completely cooled down, and then start the adjustment.
• Place the fuser unit on a flat surface.
• Be sure not to damage the fuser belt with the gap adjustment jig.
• Adjust the gap while the pressure roller is contacted to the fuser belt.
• If the fuser unit is not installed in the equipment after replacement or adjustment and has to be
stored as a unit for a long time, be sure to leave the pressure roller released from the fuser belt.
[5] [4]
[3]
6
[1] [2]
Fig.6-59
<Jig to be used>
Separation guide gap adjustment jig
1.3mm
0.8mm
Fig.6-60
[1]
Fig.6-61
Notes:
Confirm that the position of the plate [2] indicates "contact".
[2]
Fig.6-62
[3]
Fig.6-63
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the separation guide cover [4].
[4]
Fig.6-64
Fig.6-65
(6) Insert the jig into the windows [A] and [E]. Adjust the gap between the pressure roller and the
fixing plate of the separation guide by moving it so that the jig thickness 0.8 mm level can be put
in smoothly but that for the 1.3 mm one is not. After the adjustment, tighten the screws of the
fixing plate of the separation guide.
[A] [E]
Fig.6-66
Fig.6-67
[A] Checking
Fig.6-68
(2) Remove the platen sheet.
Fig.6-69
(3) Close the DSDF and check if the positioning
pins fit the holes on the DSDF.
Notes:
If the positioning pins cannot be fitted into the
holes on the DSDF properly, go to P. 6-78
"[B] Adjustment" to adjust the position of the
DSDF and then install it.
Fig.6-70
Fig.6-71
Fig.6-72
(2) Loosen fixing screws.
Fig.6-73
(3) Position the pins with the holes on the DSDF
by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes
when the DSDF is closed.
Fig.6-74
Fig.6-75
(5) Tighten the fixing screws of the front side.
Fig.6-76
(6) Install the brackets on the hinges.
Fig.6-77
(7) Place the platen sheet on the original glass
and align it to the top left corner.
Close the DSDF gently and open it to check
if the platen sheet is attached properly.
Fig.6-78
[A] Checking
(1) Close the DSDF.
(2) Light the exposure lamp.
• Perform FS-03-267.
(3) Visually check the gap between platen guide holder "A" and upper surface of the cover "B" from
the left hand side of the equipment. If the value is not within the tolerance, perform the
adjustment according to the following procedure.
A A 0mm
B B
Fig.6-79
Fig.6-80
• Adjust the gap on the front side by means of the screw on the hinge on the exit side of the
DSDF.
Turn it clockwise: Lowered
Turn it counterclockwise: Heightened
Fig.6-81
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Fig.6-82
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the DSDF, select
[Sort mode] and [1 Sided → 1 Sided] and then press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Fig.6-83
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face down on the original tray of the DSDF, select
[Sort mode] and [2 Sided → 2 Sided] and then press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Fig.6-84
6
(2) Turn the adjustment screw while checking the scale of the hinge.
+ -
-
+
Fig.6-85
(3) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of
"-", and if "D", shift it to "+".
Fig.6-86 Fig.6-87
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
(4) Check the skew of the copy image by using a chart.
Fig.6-88
Fig.6-89
Fig.6-90 Fig.6-91 6
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
+
-
Fig.6-92
(5) Tighten the screw loosened in step (3). Check the skew of the copy image by using a chart.
(6) Install the DSDF front side cover.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
E F
E F
[ 1 ] Front side
Fig.6-97
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.
Notes:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.0423 mm.
Fig.6-98
Fig.6-99
(2) Select [2 Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(3) Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.
K
J
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the right side to the feeding direction (J), enter
a value larger than the current one.
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the left side to the feeding direction (K), enter
a value smaller than the current one.
Notes:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.0423mm.
(2) Press [OK].
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the DSDF.
(2) Select the [Sort mode] and press the [START] button.
(3) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Perform FS-05-3042.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than
the current one.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than
the current one.
I
Fig.6-101
(1) Take off the DSDF left cover. P. 4-294 "4.11.10 DSDF left cover"
6
(2) Close the original jam access cover and the DSDF.
(3) Perform FS-05-3221.
Notes:
Be sure not to close or open the original jam access cover and the DSDF until step (5) is
finished. If you do so, the adjustment value will be reset. In this case, repeat the adjustment from
step (2).
Fig.6-102
LED1
Fig.6-103 Fig.6-104
(6) Perform automatic adjustment (FS-05-3210).
Notes:
After the manual adjustment is performed, be sure to do the automatic one.
6
Fig.6-105
(2) Place the platen sheet on the original glass and align it to the top left corner. Close the DSDF
gently and open it to check if the platen sheet is attached properly.
Fig.6-106
If the adjustment values can be confirmed from the pre-change board during its replacement, read
them from the connected equipment and then enter them into the post-change one.
A4-size adjustment value check: Perform FS-05-4838-1.
LT-size adjustment value check: Perform FS-05-4838-2.
If the adjustment values cannot be confirmed, perform "[B] Adjustment with DIP-SW".
Adjustment must be performed with 2 types of adjustment sheets for the A4 and LT series.
The adjustment value of A4 will be applied to the operation with A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, FOLIO, 8K, 16K.
The adjustment value of LT will be applied to the operation with LD, LG, LT, LT-R, COMP, 13 LG, 8.5”
SQ.
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the board access cover.
A4
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LT
ON
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 [1]
Fig.6-107
Button1 Button2
Fig.6-108
[2]
Fig.6-109
Tips:
• Use an adjustment sheet [1] made of plastic resin which is light and accurate in measurement
(e.g. OHP film).
• To reduce frictional resistance with the vertical alignment roller [3] on the process tray, place a
sheet of B5 paper [4] beneath the adjustment sheet [1] on the vertical alignment roller [3].
• Confirm the gap between paper and the alignment plate [2] by moving the adjustment sheet
[1] forward and backward.
(7) When the adjustment is completed, press the [Button2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory.
When the value is stored normally, the [LED1] on the control panel will blink for the number of
times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times the [LED1] lamp blinks and its corresponding
moved amount (mm).
(9) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
If the adjustment values cannot be confirmed, perform the adjustment in the following procedure. 6
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
Fig.6-110
• When adjusting the rear side for A4 size • When adjusting the rear side for LT size
paper: paper:
Turn ON pin 1, 3, and 4. Turn ON pin 1, 2, 3, and 4.
• When adjusting the front side for A4 size • When adjusting the front side for LT size
paper: paper:
Turn ON pin 1, 3, and 4. Turn ON pin 2, 3, and 4.
Tips:
Although there are four setting types for the SW1 as shown above, perform only one of them
since the adjustment values are used in common.
Button1 Button2
Fig.6-111
(6) When the adjustment is completed, press [Button 2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray.
When the value is stored normally, [LED 1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times [LED 1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment
value.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(1) Create 2 types of booklet samples (1 set each) using the main unit.
Sample 1 Sample 2
Media type Recommended plain paper Recommended plain paper
Paper size A4 A3
Number of sheets 5 sheets 5 sheets
(2) Measure the stapling and folding positions of the samples, and then perform adjustment
accordingly.
For stapling and folding, paper on the stacker of the stacker unit is moved to an exclusive
mechanism for stapling or folding. Therefore adjustment must be performed individually for the
folding stopping position of the stacker and the stapling stopping position. 6
* Check the folding position at the centerfold page of the sample.
Center
Paper exit
fold
direction
page
-2mm - +2mm
-2mm - +2mm
Fig.6-112
Staple Staple
Fig.6-113
Fig.6-114
When the folding position is Decrease the value of the folding
deviates from the specified one position adjustment in order to
by more than 2.0 mm move the folding stopping
Specified position (the position of the
folding position stapling hooks) of the stacker
downward.
Folding position
P. 6-101 "6.13.4 Folding
position adjustment"
Stacker hook
Fig.6-115
When the stapling position is Decrease the value of the
deviated from the specified one stapling position adjustment in
more than -0.50 mm order to move the stapling
Stapling position stopping position (the position of
the stapling hooks) of the stacker
downward.
Folding position
P. 6-101 "6.13.5 Stapling
position adjustment"
Stacker hook
Fig.6-116
When the stapling position is Increase the value of the stapling
Folding position deviated from the specified one position adjustment in order to
more than 0.50 mm move the stapling stopping
position (the position of the
Stapling position stapling hooks) of the stacker
upward.
P. 6-101 "6.13.5 Stapling
Stacker hook position adjustment"
Fig.6-117
(2) Open the cover, pull out the saddle stitch section, and then loosen the 2 screws.
Fig.6-118
Fig.6-119
(4) Tighten the 2 screws, return the saddle stitch section, and then close the cover.
Fig.6-120
If the adjustment values cannot be confirmed, perform the adjustment in the following procedure.
ON
[2]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[1]
Fig.6-121
(3) Turn the power of the equipment ON. The finisher enters into the stopping position adjustment
mode.
(4) [LED1] on the finisher control panel blinks. The number of times it blinks indicates the current
adjustment value.
Notes:
When the adjustment value goes further in minus numbers in the table above, the distance
between the paper edge and the holes becomes wider. When it goes further in plus numbers,
this distance becomes narrower.
(6) When the value change is completed, press [Button2] on the finisher control panel to determine
the adjustment value. (The adjustment value is written into the flash ROM.)
(7) Turn the power of the equipment OFF.
(8) Turn all the bits of SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control PC board OFF.
(9) Install the board access cover of the Finisher.
7.2 PM Display
If multiple parts have reached the maintenance time, the sum of the corresponding code values listed
above is displayed in hexadecimal numbers.
For example, if the peripheral parts of the process units (K) and developer material (K) reach the
maintenance time, the 4-digit hexadecimal number code will be “0188” in hexadecimal numbers:
0008+0080+0100=0188.
• FS-08-5576: Current value of PM counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
• FS-08-5577: Current value of PM time counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
When the current value of “2nd TRANSFER” on the main screen or “2nd TRANSFER ROLLER” on
the sub screen in the 20 PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.
Fig. 7-1
• Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
Authentication screen
FS Menu
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 7-2
* When the authentication screen appears, press [OK]. (Enter the password, if one has been set.)
* To finish the PM support mode, shut down the equipment by pressing and holding [ON/OFF] on
the main screen for a few seconds.
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
1. Main screen
1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Fig. 7-3
1 Displaying of the number of printed / developed pages (Page/D. cnt), drive counts (Cnt.) and
previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move
to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed
2 Moving to the next/previous page
3 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the unit parts
4 Displaying of the present drive counts
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
5 Displaying of the standard number of printed / developed pages to replace the unit parts
6 Displaying of the present number of printed / developed pages
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), “-” is displayed and “CHECK
SUBUNIT” is displayed at the top
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of printed / developed pages has
exceeded its PM standard number.
7 Moving to the sub screen of the selected unit
8 Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit counters 4 and 6 , including all sub unit
(parts) counters belonging to that unit When the unit is not selected, all counters are cleared.
9 Displaying of the main unit name
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Fig. 7-4
1 Displaying of the number of printed / developed pages and drive counts and previous
replacement date for a chosen sub unit
2 Moving to the next/previous page
3 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the sub unit (parts)
4 Displaying of the present drive counts
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
5 Displaying of the standard number of printed / developed pages to replace the sub unit (parts)
6 Displaying of the present number of printed / developed pages
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of printed / developed pages has
exceeded its PM standard number.
7 Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name
8 Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters
9 Back to the main screen
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fig. 7-5
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fig. 7-6
2 1
Fig. 7-7
1 When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of printed / developed pages” and
Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.
2 When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to
the main or sub screen.
Example 1:
When the number of printed / developed pages has reached the specified level
No
Yes
Is there any image failure? Replace the part.
No
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of printed / developed pages has reached the
specified level
Yes
Does it exceed the specified drive count? Replace the part.
No
Fig. 7-9
Developer material
No
Fig. 7-10
Example 4:
When an image failure occurs though the performance index does not exceed the threshold number
Developer material
No
Item Description
Cleaning A: Clean with alcohol
B: Clean with soft pad, cloth or vacuum cleaner
Lubrication/ L: Launa 40
Coating SI: Silicon oil
W1: White grease (Molykote EM-30L)
W2: White grease (Molykote HP-300)
AV: Alvania No.2
FL: Floil (GE-334C)
C: Coating material (SANKOL CFD-409M)
Replacement Value: Replacement cycle
R1: Replacement
R3: Replace if deformed or damaged.
Operation check O: After cleaning or replacement, confirm there is no problem.
Notes:
1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Lubricate the replacement parts
according to the replacement cycle.
A5 A4 A3
Fig. 7-12
B10
B9
B14
B5
B4
B10
B10
B1 B2
B3
B14
B12
B10
B10
B11
B13
Fig. 7-13
C4 C1
C2
C6
C5
C3
Fig. 7-14
D3
Fig. 7-15
E3
E5
E4
E2
E1
Fig. 7-18
F2
F8 F5
F4 F1
F7
F3
F6
F9
7
F10
F11
F13
F12
Fig. 7-19
Fig. 7-20
Fig. 7-21
2. Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are copied due to the damaged
blade regardless of the number of output pages which have been made
B Side seal
Side seal B
A
0 mm
Blade A
0~0.3 mm Blade 0 mm
0~0.3 mm
Fig. 7-22
After the side seals are attached, move the bracket retaining the blade and check that it is neither
caught nor comes up on to the side seal.
Normal Being caught Coming up on
Side seal Side seal Side seal
Fig. 7-23
* F7: Drum surface potential (V0) sensor / G8: Drum surface potential (V0) sensor shutter
Clean them with a vacuum cleaner.
Notes:
When cleaning them, be careful not to let any toner or developer material enter into the detecting
section of each drum surface potential (V0) sensor.
G6
G5 G1
Fig. 7-24
Fig. 7-25
30mm
7
Fig. 7-26
(4) Slide the cleaning jig to where the white streak appears.
(5) Pull out the cleaning jig while manually turning the gear to rotate the developer sleeve.
Gear
Fig. 7-27
Tip:
If foreign matter is not removed by the above procedure, take off the developer unit,
discharge the developer material on to a sheet of clean paper and then remove any foreign
matter found. If you cannot find any foreign matter, exchange the developer material.
Foreign matter
Fig. 7-28
4. Scattered toner
If toner is scattered in the developer unit or has accumulated in the developer unit duct, check
if the toner filter has been periodically replaced. If not, it may increase the amount of the toner
scattered around the developer unit.
Notes:
After the toner filter was replaced, check if the following parts are stained with toner and clean
them if required:
G1: Developer unit, G2: Developer unit drive section, G4: Front shield, G5: Side shield
H1
H2
Fig. 7-29
I3 I6 I7 I2 I1 I5 J4
I9
I10
I8
I7
Fig. 7-30
2. Cleaning procedure
Fully clean up the toner and such adhering to the roller with alcohol, and then wipe it with a
dry cloth until no trace remains. Take care not to have the transfer belt surface being
damaged or dented. Replace the transfer belt with a new one regardless of the number of
output pages, if any crack or major scar is found.
2. Counter resetting is not possible in the PM support mode because the 1st transfer roller is not
a PM part. Therefore reset the counter in the following PM management settings after the 1st
transfer roller was replaced.
- FS-08-6314-0: 1st transfer roller (K)
* I3: Cleaning facing roller, I4: 2nd transfer facing roller, I6: Tension roller, I7: Idling roller
Fully clean up the toner and such adhering to the roller with alcohol, since an image failure may
occur if there is any dirt remaining on the roller. Also, remove dust and toner scattering adhering
to the inside of the transfer belt unit in order to keep rollers clean.
2. Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
0~0.5 mm 0~0.5 mm
A A
0.5 ~ 1.5 mm
0.5 ~ 1.5 mm
Fig. 7-31
J1
J2
Fig. 7-32
K3
K4
K5
Fig. 7-33
[1]
Fig. 7-34
[3] [2]
[1] [3]
Fig. 7-35
L1
L8
L12
L7
L11
L5
L6
L10
L9 L13
Fig. 7-36
7
Lubrica Replacement Parts
Operation
Items to check Cleaning tion/ (x 1,000 (x 1,000 drive list
check
Coating sheets) counts) <P-I>
L1 Fuser belt 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-22
L2 Fuser belt thermostat R3 R3 42-21
L3 Fuser belt center R3 R3 42-21
thermistor (center/edge)
L4 Separation plate A R3 R3 41-14
L5 Fuser belt pad 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-44
L6 Fuser belt lubricating sheet 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-21
L7 Pressure roller 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-17
L8 Separation guide A R3 R3 41-25
L9 Fuser entry guide A R3 R3 43-34
L10 Front fuser belt oil recovery sheet 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-21
L11 Rear fuser belt oil recovery sheet 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-21
L12 Rear fuser gear oil recovery sheet 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-21
L13 Rear fuser cover oil recovery sheet 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-21
L14 Fuser gear shaft W2 520/590/660/720 632/632/626/531 42-2
42-17
43-4
L15 Fuser gear W2 R3 R3 42-1
42-18
43-1
43-2
L16 Fuser drive gear R3 R3 39-21
(on the equipment side)
L17 Pressure roller contact/ W2 R3 R3 43-11
release cam
[1]
Fig. 7-37
Fig. 7-38
[1]
Fig. 7-39
Fig. 7-40
M6 M5 M4 M7
M3 M2 M1
Fig. 7-41
N3
N4 N1
N2
Fig. 7-42
Replacement
Lubrica Parts
Items to check Cleaning tion/ (x 1,000 Operation
list
7
(x 1,000 check
Coating drive <P-I>
sheets)
counts)
N1 Upper paper exit roller A 36-6
N2 Lower paper exit roller A 35-27
N3 Upper discharge brush A R3 R3 36-17
N4 Lower discharge brush A R3 R3 35-29
* N3: Upper discharge brush, N4: Lower discharge brush
Replace the discharge brush with a new one if its bristles do not touch the output paper.
O5
O7
Fig. 7-44
*3: Remove the DSDF pickup unit. Release the hook. Remove the lever from the DSDF pickup unit.
Apply grease (Molykote EM-30L) by 0.01 cc to the edge of the shaft. (See the figure below.) 7
Fig. 7-45
P6 P7 P2 P1 P7
P3
P7
Fig. 7-46
Q10
Q16 Q21
Q1
Q9
Q2
Q11
Q17
Q8 Q12
Q14
Q3
Q19
Q15 Q23
Q20 Q13
Q18
Q4 7
Q7
Q5
Q6
Q22
Fig. 7-47
*1: Parts list <P-I> represents the page item in “MJ-1111/1112 Service Parts List”.
* Q18: Shaft
Apply an adequate amount of white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the entire shaft [3].
[1] 7
[2]
[3]
Fig. 7-48
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
Fig. 7-49
[1]
Fig. 7-50
[2]
[1]
Fig. 7-51
[1]
Fig. 7-52
[1]
Fig. 7-53
[1]
Fig. 7-54
1. Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2. Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5. Fuser belt 7
The oil co-packed with the fuser belt and PM kits should be stored in a special container to keep it in
a stable condition. Do not transfer it into another container.
6. Fuser unit
The oil inside the fuser unit may leak when it is tilted. Therefore, keep the fuser unit in a horizontal
position when it is being stored or during transportation.
7. Paper/Envelope
Avoid storing copy paper and envelope in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
Parts list
KIT name Component Qty.
<P-I>*1
EPU-KIT-FC556-G Needle electrode 1 64-13
Main charger grid 1 64-17
Needle electrode cleaner 1 64-16
Drum cleaning blade 1 63-21
EPU-KIT-FC556-S Needle electrode 1 64-13
(85ppm: K) Main charger grid 1 64-17
Needle electrode cleaner 1 64-16
Drum cleaning blade 1 63-21
TBU-KIT-FC556 2nd transfer facing roller cleaning pad 1 30-51
Transfer belt cleaning blade 1 34-1
Transfer belt cleaner side seal (front) 1 34-18
Transfer belt cleaner side seal (rear) 1 34-22
FLTR-KIT-FC55 Toner filter 1 49-25
Ozone filter 1 1 49-34
Ozone filter 2 1 49-3
FR-KIT-FC556-FU Fuser belt 1 42-22
Pressure roller 1 42-17
Fuser belt pad 1 42-44
Fuser belt lubricating sheet 1 42-21
Front fuser belt oil recovery sheet 1 42-21
Rear fuser belt oil recovery sheet 1 42-21
Rear fuser gear oil recovery sheet 1 42-21
Rear fuser cover oil recovery sheet 1 42-21
Silicon oil 1 -
ROL-KIT-FC75 Pickup roller 1 11-36
Feed roller 1 11-36
Separation roller 1 11-35
KIT-ROL-DSDF Pickup roller 1 81-18
Feed roller 1 81-14
Separation roller 1 85-21
ROL-KIT-FC75-U Pickup roller 1 11-36
(for Tandem LCF) Feed roller 1 11-101
Separation roller 1 11-35
ROL-KIT-MP2502-U Pickup roller 2 5-46
(for MP-2502) Feed roller 1 4-2
Separation roller 1 4-3
*1: Part list <P-I> represents the page item in “e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A Service Parts
List”.
The parts used for the maintenance of this equipment are as follows.
Parts list
No. Item Purpose
<P-I>*1
1 Cleaning brush Cleaning inside of the equipment 201-1
2 Doctor blade cleaning jig Cleaning the doctor blade 201-2
3 Wire holder jig Fixing the wire at the assembly of the carriage wire 201-3
4 DSDF positioning pin Determining the position of the DSDF 201-4
5 Doctor-sleeve jig Measuring the gap between the developer sleeve and 201-5
the doctor blade
6 Belt tension jig Adjusting the belt tension at the installation of the 201-6
scan motor
7 Separation plate gap adjustment For adjusting the gap between the fuser belt and 201-7
jig separation plate (gauge 0.50, 0.55, 0.60)
8 Separation plate gap adjustment For adjusting the gap between the fuser belt and 201-8
jig separation plate (gauge 0.30, 0.60, 0.80)
9 Drum bag Storing the drum 201-9
7
10 Toner seal plate Preventing foreign matter from entering into the toner 201-10
supply opening (for transporting the unpacked
equipment)
11 Patting powder For transfer belt 201-11
12 Color test chart (TCC-2) For test print (A4/LT) 201-12
13 Color test chart For test print (A3/LD) 201-13
14 DSDF stopper jig Pressing the DSDF to prevent it from becoming open 201-14
15 Separation guide gap adjustment For adjusting the gap between the pressure roller and 201-15
jig separation guide
*1: Part list <P-I> represents the page item in “e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A Service Parts
List”.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
Fig. 7-55
Fig. 7-56
Remarks:
1. Insert the upper side of the stopper jig
into the hole of the DSDF.
Fig. 7-57
Fig. 7-58
Parts list
Symbol Grease name Type Color Volume Container
<P-I>*
L Launa 40 Lubricating oil Yellow or 100 cc Oiler 201-101
transparent
W1 White grease Grease White 100 g Tube 201-102
(Molykote EM-30L)
W2 White grease Heat-resisting White 10 g Bottle 201-103
(Molykote HP-300) grease
AV Alvania No.2 Grease Amber 100 g Tube 201-104
FL Floil (GE-334C) Conductive Black 20 g Bottle 201-105
grease
C SANKOL CFD-409M Coating material Transparent 90 g Bottle 51-11
(MJ-1111/1112)
* Part list <P-I> represents the page item in “e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A Service Parts
List” and “MJ-1111/1112 Service Parts List”.
Item Description
Cleaning A: Clean with alcohol
B: Clean with soft pad, cloth or vacuum cleaner
Lubrication/ W1: White grease (Molykote EM-30L)
Coating W2: White grease (Molykote HP-300)
Replacement Value: Replacement cycle
R1: Replacement
R2: For preventive maintenance, check if the parts are damaged and replace
them as required. If the parts are not replaced at the machine refreshing
interval, inspect them at the subsequent PM.
R3: Replace if deformed or damaged. If the parts are not replaced at the
machine refreshing interval, inspect them at the subsequent PM.
R4: Lubrication recommended: If the parts are not lubricated at the machine
refreshing interval, inspect their lubrication status at the subsequent PM.
Operation check O: After cleaning or replacement, confirm there is no problem.
Notes:
• When performing machine refreshment, check the items in the preventive maintenance checklist
in addition to the items in the machine refreshing checklist.
• Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Lubricate the replacement parts
according to the replacement cycle.
Replacement
Parts
Lubrication/ (x 1,000 Operation
Items to check Cleaning (x 1,000 list
Coating drive check
sheets) <P-I>
counts)
1 Drum and developer W1 R4 R4
drive unit
2 Transfer belt drive unit W1 R4 R4
3 Fuser drive unit W1 R4 R4
4 Felt (fuser unit) R3 R3 41-3
B4 Transport roller R3 R3 11-22
B9 Registration roller R3 R3 10-1
B14 Transport roller R3 R3 11-22
(Tandem LCF)
C1 ADU transport roller 1 R3 R3 18-6
C2 ADU transport roller 2 R3 R3 18-5
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A © 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 56
Replacement
Parts
Lubrication/ (x 1,000 Operation
Items to check Cleaning (x 1,000 list
Coating drive check
sheets) <P-I>
counts)
C3 ADU transport roller 3 R3 R3 18-7
C4 Duplexing bridge R3 R3 20-12
transport roller
D7 Transport roller R3 R3 15-8
I1 Transfer belt A R2 R2 31-33
I2 1st transfer roller B R2 R2 30-58
I3 Cleaning facing roller A R3 R3 31-16
I4 2nd transfer facing roller A R2 R2 30-34
I6 Tension roller A R3 R3 33-11
I7 Idling roller A R3 R3 30-55
I9 Recovery blade R3 R3 34-17
J1 Sensor shutter R3 R3 6-28
J2 Image quality sensor R3 R3 6-5
K4 Registration roller R3 R3 21-28 7
L2 Fuser belt thermostat R3 R3 42-21
L3 Fuser belt thermistor R3 R3 42-21
(edge/center)
L14 Fuser gear shaft W2 42-2
42-17
43-4
L15 Fuser gear W2 R3 R3 42-1
42-18
43-1
43-2
L16 Fuser drive gear R3 R3 39-21
(on the equipment side)
L17 Pressure roller contact/ W2 R3 R3 43-11
release cam
* 3: Fuser drive unit
For lubrication, refer to P. 4-218 "4.9.19 Pressure roller contact/release motor (M48)".
When a trouble occurs, check if an error code is displayed on the LCD screen of the control panel first.
If displayed, refer to “8.2Error Code List” to figure out the classification and contents of the error, and
then refer to “8.3Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code” to remove its cause.
If not displayed and the equipment does not operate properly or images are not printed properly, refer
to “8.4Other errors” or “8.5Troubleshooting for the Image” to remove its cause.
Notes:
If unusual odor is detected or if smoke or fire comes out of the equipment, immediately turn the
power OFF.
Even in the cases other than the above, fully observe safety precautions.
If any PC board or HDD shall be replaced, refer to P. 9-19 "9.2 Precautions, Procedures and
Settings for Replacing PC Boards and HDD".
1. Serial Number
2. List Print
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual / Service Handbook for the detailed procedure to obtain
a List Print.
A. Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by CSV file.
FS-30-300: All CSV files
B. Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by printing it out.
FS-30-101: 05 code
FS-30-102: 08 code
FS-30-104: Pixel counter data (Toner cartridge standard)
FS-30-106: Error history (1000 cases max)
FS-30-108: Firmware update log (200 cases max)
FS-30-110: Power on/off log (100 cases max)
3. For image-related problems, collect image samples with the problem areas and the feeding direction
marked first. Then provide information about the media type and weight, and the print data / spool
files for duplicating the problem.
4. For abnormal acoustic noise, describe the situation in as much detail as possible.
5. For hardware-related problems, provide photos of any broken parts, paper jams, etc.
In case of paper jams, include the type of paper and its manufacturer.
6. For software-related problems, provide list prints, TopAccess Logs and the detailed procedure
needed to duplicate the problem.
* This is the minimum information required to report a complaint. It would be appreciated if you could
obtain additional information.
* Follow the directions of the service center if they request additional information as each issue is
unique to some degree.
[ 1 ] General description
The purpose of collecting the debug logs is to acquire the information for analyzing problems which
occurred during the MFP's operation. In such a case, you can collect the debug logs by inserting a USB
device into the MFP. Even if the power has to be turned OFF with the main power switch after a
problem occurs, the debug logs will be saved in the MFP (up to 3 logs). If the debug logs have already
been saved in the MFP, they also can be collected.
When the debug logs are collected, also do so for the following information since it may be difficult to
investigate only using the debug log.
• List print mode [FS-30-300: All CSV files]
• Job logs below in TopAccess -> [Logs] -> [Export Logs]
- Print Job Log Export
- Fax Transmission Journal Export
- Fax Reception Journal Export
- Scan Log Export
- Messages Log Export
• Problem occurrence time
Or the time when the customer called if it is difficult to work out when it occurred.
• Status of when you collected the debug log
As in the example below, check the status to know if the problem occurred at the debug log
collection or how the customer recovered it.
E.g.
- You checked the problem and connected a USB device to the equipment.
- No problem occurred when an attempt to collect the debug log was made; however the customer
did turn the main power switch OFF when the problem occurred, so the log can be collected.
[ 2 ] Collection procedure
1. Note
When collecting a log, be sure to obtain consent from the user in advance and get the dedicated
script file from the service center.
2. About USB devices
Be sure to format the USB device with FAT16/32 beforehand. (Recommend size: 2GB or more)
3. Advance preparation of collection
Store the dedicated script file to the root directory of the USB device.
4. Procedure for collecting debug logs
(1) Insert the USB device, in which the dedicated script file is stored, into the MFP while the power is
ON.
• After the USB device is inserted into the MFP, the screen will change.
(2) Select [Basic Debug Logs], [All Debug Logs] or [9S-300CSV Print Job List] and then press the
[START] button.
• [9S-300CSV Print Job List] can be selected together with [Basic Debug Logs] or [All Debug
Logs].
• The log collection of [All Debug Logs] will start automatically if no operation is made for 30
seconds after the screen has been changed.
• The LED of the MFP starts blinking when the log collection has begun.
• The panel display will be changed during the log collection depending on the conditions of the
MFP. However, the log collection will continue as long as the LED is blinking.
(3) When the log collection is finished, the beeping is heard. After the beeping has stopped, remove
the USB device.
• The MFP will reboot automatically in 10 seconds after a beeping sound.
Notes:
• Do not remove the USB device while the LED in the MFP is blinking.
• If the LED does not start blinking after the USB device is inserted and a few minutes have
passed, try the procedure from step (1) again.
• If there is no beeping after the LED starts blinking (about 20 minutes), try procedure from step
(1) again.
• If the USB device is inserted when the MFP is not ready, the debug logs cannot be collected.
[ 1 ] Management No.
A management No. consists of 13 digits with letters of the alphabet and numbers. The following shows
the meaning of each block.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 (digits)
1 2 2 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
[ 2 ] Applicable units
A traceability label is attached to the following units.
3
8
6 7 5
Fig.8-1
8.2.1 Jam
A Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: 1st drawer 4: 2nd drawer 5: 3rd drawer
6: 4th drawer 7: Optional LCF 8: Unused
B Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV
9: B5 A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused
H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQK: A3 wide / LD wideL: UnusedM: 8K
N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10, Q: DL, R: Monarch, S: CHO-3, T: YOU-4U: SRA3 (320x450)
V: SRA3 (320 x 460) W:13x19"(330x483)
Z: Not selected a: Envelope Kaku-2
C Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple
9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch B: Center fold C: Top Left D: Top Right
E: Top Center F: Left Center
D ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
E APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
F Duplex mode
Copy:
0: Single-sided/Single-sided, 1: Book, 2: Double-sided/Single-sided, 4: Double-sided/
Duplex copying, 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Printer
0: Single-sided, 8: Double-sided
FAX
0: Single-sided, 8: Double-sided
e-Filing
0: Single-sided, 8: Double-sided
List printing
0: Single-sided
G Unused
H Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 3: Right 4: Top 5: Bottom 6: Book+Top
7: Book+Bottom 8: Left+Top 9: Left+Bottom A: Right+TopB: Right+Bottom
I Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Unused 5: NEG/POS
J Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page3: Edge erase and Dual-page
K Unused
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the bypass feed sensor)
[E130] 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor)
[E150] 3rd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 3rd drawer feed sensor)
[E160] 4th drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 34th drawer feed sensor)
[E180] Option LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
[E230] 1st drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 1st drawer transport sensor)
[E240] 2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd drawer transport sensor)
[E320] 3rd drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer transport sensor)
[E350] 4th drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer transport sensor)
[E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer transport sensor)
[E360] 4th drawer transport jam (not reaching the 3rd drawer transport sensor)
[E370] 3rd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 3rd drawer transport sensor)
[E380] 4th drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the 4th drawer transport sensor)
[E3F0] Tandem LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the tandem LCF transport sensor)
[E511] ADU transport jam (Paper not reaching the duplexing unit path entrance sensor)
[E540] ADU transport jam (Paper not reaching the duplexing unit path exit sensor)
Next
Step Check Item Result Measure
Step
Jamming transport path Open the cover of the unit/area whose
picture is flashing on the control panel
1
and remove any paper on the transport
path.
[E551] Paper remaining on the transport path (when a service call occurs)
[E552] Paper remaining on the transport path (when the cover is closed)
Next
Step Check Item Result Measure
Step
Jamming transport path Open the cover of the unit/area whose
picture is flashing on the control panel
1 8
and remove any paper on the transport
path.
Sensor in the jamming area • Sensor check (Refer to the table
below)
2
• Harness check
• Connector check
PFC board • Harness check
• Connector check
3
• Board check
Notes:
If the jam is occurring in the ADU or LCF, check the board in each unit.
8
Replace parts Remarks
Bridge unit cover opening/closing
detection switch
PFC board
[2] [1]
A B
Fig.8-2
[3]
Fig.8-3
Perform the replacement with the transparent film set or with the
guide [3].
[E770] Original remaining at the DSDF original width detection sensor-1 jam
[EA24] Paper transport stop jam in Finisher (between entrance & transport sensor)
[EA25] Paper transport jam in Finisher (after paper stack was exited)
[EA26] Paper transport jam in Finisher (Stop signal received from equipment)
[EA27] Paper transport jam in Finisher (Entrance sensor ON at the slower timing than the
specified one)
[EA28] Paper transport stop jam in Finisher (paper holder plate operation delay)
[EA29] Paper transport stop jam in Finisher (paper stack transport delay)
MJ-1112
Fig.8-4
• Check if the leaf springs [1] and the assist leaf springs [2]
of the transport pinch roller (for the saddle) are
misshapen. 8
If they are warped or deformed, replace them.
For the removal procedure of the leaf springs [1] and the
assist leaf springs [2], refer to the following figures.
Fig.8-5
[2]
[1]
Fig.8-6
[1]
Fig.8-7
Notes:
In order to confirm that there is no warpage or
deformation on the leaf springs [1] and the assist leaf
springs [2] of the transport pinch roller (for the saddle),
remove them and put them on a flat place.
Fig.8-8
Fig.8-9
Fig.8-10
[3]
[4]
[5]
Fig.8-11
[6]
[4]
[7]
Fig.8-12
[7] [4]
Fig.8-13
[7] [6]
Fig.8-14
[6] [7]
Fig.8-15
[EF15] Saddle Stitch Finisher side alignment motor home position detection abnormality
[EF17] Saddle Stitch Finisher folding blade home position detection abnormality
[EF21] Hole Punch Unit paper leading edge skew detection abnormality
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
Paper Paper
Paper position
sensor (S6-1, S6-2)
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
Paper
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
8
• Figure out the cause of the paper stopping (e.g. folding)
and correct it. Then remove the paper.
Paper position sensor (S6-1/S6-2) • Sensor check
• Connector check
• Harness check
Punch controller board • Connector check (CN19)
• Board check
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
Paper Paper
Paper position
sensor (S6-1, S6-2)
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
Paper
Skew sensor
(S7-1, S7-2)
8
• Figure out the cause of the paper stopping (e.g. folding)
and correct it. Then remove the paper.
• Remove paper dust or punches on the paper position
sensor (S6-1, S6-2).
Paper position sensor (S6-1/S6-2) • Sensor check
• Connector check
• Harness check
Punch controller board • Connector check (CN19)
• Board check
Proce Next
Check item Result Measure
dure Step
1 Does the exposure lamp Yes It is lit. 2
light? (Perform the output No It is not lit. 3
check: FS-03-267)
2 Shading correction plate Check if there is any scratch or stain on the
shading correction plate.
Mirror Check if the mirror is tilted.
1. Check that the lens is reflected in the mirror
looking at carriage-1 from the upper
position.
2. Check that the mirror is secured at the leaf
spring.
Carriage 1. Check if the carriage is tilted by moving it to
the left stopping point. 8
2. Check if the wire fixing screw is loosened.
3. Check if the movement of the carriage is
unstable due to disengagement of the
carriage roller.
Exposure lamp 1. Check if the exposure lamp is correctly lit.
2. Check if the harness is connected properly
to the exposure lamp connector. (CN123,
CN010)
3. When the carriage is driven, check if the
harness interferes with it or parts are caught
in it.
CCD board / Lens unit 1. Check if the connector of the CCD board is
connected properly. (CN120, CN001)
2. Check if the CCD board is installed properly.
(Check that the lens unit is not tilted or the
screw is securely tighten.)
SYS board 1. Check if the connector of the SYS board
(CN120, CN123) is connected properly.
2. Check if the mounted parts on the SYS
board are damaged or abnormal.
3. Check if the power is output from the SYS
board for CCD. (CN122).
Proce
Check item Measure
dure
1 Lens unit 1. Check if the connector is properly connected all the way in
the CCD board.
2. Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of parts
mounted on the CCD board.
3. Replace the Lens unit.
2 SYS board 1. Check if the connector is properly connected all the way in
the SYS board. (CN120)
2. Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of parts
mounted on the SYS board.
3. Check if +5V is output to the SYS board by measuring the
voltage of both edges of the capacitor C283 or C284. (For
both C283 and C284, the upper side is GND and the lower
side is +5V.)
4. Replace the SYS board.
3 Harnesses 1. Check if the harness has any scratch on it or is open
circuited or caught anywhere.
2. Check if there is any abnormality in the connector terminal
or the contacting surface of the flat harness.
3. Replace the harness between the SYS board and the CCD
board.
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time / Downloading
firmware with an incorrect model
8
Classification Error content
Scanning system related service Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified
call time / Downloading firmware with an incorrect model
Proce Next
Check item Result Measure
dure Step
1 Carriage locking Check if the carriage locking screw for
packaging is attached.
2 Are the carriages slightly Yes Check if the circuits of the CCD board are
moved to the feeding abnormal.
direction?/Are the No 3
carriages staying at a
position other than home
position?
3 CCD board • Check if the connector pin is disconnected
or the harness is short circuited or open
circuited. (CN001)
• Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• If the model of the firmware downloaded is
incorrect, a C270 error (exposure lamp
blinks twice) occurs. If the exposure lamp
blinks twice, download the correct firmware.
4 Carriage home position 1. Check if the harness of the carriage home
sensor position sensor is connected properly.
(CN121, J002)
2. Check if the harness is caught or open
circuited.
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time
[C473] Surge pressure detection / power and voltage upper limit abnormality
[C474] Power and voltage lower limit abnormality
8
Replace parts Remarks
Fuser belt rotation detection sensor
Detection plate (rotor) Dirty/damaged
Fuser belt Deformed/damaged
Bushing Worn
Drive plate Bend section broken
Gear Teeth damaged, worn
LGC board
[F11B] Communication error between the SYS board and the DSDF-CCD module (DSDF)
8
Classification Error item
Communication related service call Communication error between the SYS board and the DSDF-
CCD module (DSDF)
Classification Contents
Toner cartridge related service call Abnormal access between the CTRG board and LGC board
(High possibility of failure except the LGC board)
Proce Next
Check item Result Measure
dure Step
1 Does non-genuine toner Yes Use the genuine toner cartridge.
cartridge display appear No 2
when the front cover is
opened and closed?
2 Toner cartridge • Check the phenomenon by removing the
toner cartridges and reinserting them.
• Check that the CTRG board of each
cartridge is installed properly.
• Avoid touching the contact point.
• Wipe the contact point with a soft cloth if it's
stained.
3 Contact point on the Check that the spring of the contact point is not
equipment side deformed.
4 Is the spring of the contact Yes 8
point returned when it is No •
Check that the CTIF board is installed 7
pushed lightly? properly.
• Board check
5 LGC board • Connector check (CN328)
• Board check
6 Harness • Connector check (CN328, CN471, J752)
• Harness check
7 CTIF board • Check that the board is installed properly.
• Board check
8 Perform the above troubleshooting and if the C911 error is cleared, set the following self-
diagnostic codes to "0" (normal).
• FS-08-4689-3: Board information of toner cartridge(K)
[C963] Connection detection error between the SYS board and the LGC board
Classification Contents
Circuit related service call SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
Classification Contents
Circuit related service call SYS board abnormality
8
Check item Measures
Stapler • Check the connectors and harnesses between the stapler
and finisher controller PC board (CN2).
• Check the harnesses in the stapler.
1. Perform FS-05-2742.
2. Confirm that the image quality control has finished normally.
2. After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control.
1. Perform FS-08-2531.
2. Rewrite the displayed status counter from “1” - “16” to “0”.
3. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal
ready state.
Proceed to step 8.
7 Replace the image quality
sensor.
Next
Step Check item Result Measures
step
1 Use “Image quality control
abnormal detection counter
display/0 clearing (FS-08-
2531)” to check the
abnormal occurring
condition.
2 Check “Output value display Under 3
of image quality sensor / 600
High-density pattern (FS-05- 600 or High-density pattern abnormality
2731-3)” to check if the high- above Check if the laser shutter is working properly.
density pattern abnormality <Procedure>
occurs identify the color 1. Take off the process unit so that the laser
which pattern is abnormal. If shutter can be easily seen.
the value is 600 or above, it Clean around the laser shutter if the
is defined as high-density developer has been spilled over. 8
pattern abnormality. 2. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [3]
simultaneously, turn the power ON.
3. Key in “201”.
4. Press the [START] button and check if the
shutter is opened and then closed
(reciprocating 1cycle).
Check if the developer unit has been installed
properly.
1. Visually check the installation status of the
developer unit, and correct it if there is any
abnormality.
To (8) (If you have already performed this
checking cycle once, proceed to step (3).)
3 [To be corrected]
Set the value of "Image
quality closed-loop control /
Contrast voltage (FS-08-
2486)" to "0" (Invalid).
For 85ppm model, also set
the value of "Drum surface
potential sensor control
setting (FS-08-2561)" to "0"
(Disabled).
Next
Step Check item Result Measures
step
1 Check each value of the Under (High density pattern abnormality) 2
subcodes 11 of the code FS- 600 <Procedure>
05-2801. 1. Set both values of the codes FS-08-2600
and FS-08-8103 to 0.
2. Print the test chart FS-04-270 with A3/LD
for more than 2 pages. Then perform list
printing ([9]+[START]) to check if no
abnormality is found in the image density.
If any abnormality is found, correct it
referring to “25.5 Troubleshooting for the
Image”
3. .Check if the process unit (EPU tray) and
the developer unit are installed properly.
4. Check if any toner or developer material is 8
spilt around the laser shutter. Clean if so.
5. Check the center position adjustment for
each drawer is within the range preset at
the shipment (rear side: 0-3 mm).
P. 6-59 "[B] Adjustment of the gear
holder"
6. Adjust the image dimension with A3/LD.
P. 6-13 "[A] Reproduction ratio of the
primary scanning direction"
P. 6-13 "[B] Primary scanning data
writing start position"
7. Return both values of the codes FS-08-
2600 and FS-08-8103 to 1. Then proceed to
step 3. If it is the second time, proceed to
step 4.
600 or
above
2 Perform the automatic
gamma adjustment. If the
adjustment is normally
finished, this is the end of
the procedure. If the error
CE41 still occurs, repeat the
procedure from step 1.
3 Check if the harness
between the connector
CN131 on the SYS board
and the connector CN331 on
the LGC board is
disconnected or open
circuited. Correct if so.
Fig.8-16
Shutter position check when the drum cleaner unit is installed
in the EPU tray Check that the orange label is located directly
above.
P. 4-108 "3. When installing the drum cleaner unit, be sure
that the orange label attached on the shutter is clearly seen."
Fig.8-17
(2) Check that the drum unit side vertical duct is installed
properly and the slider in it can move smoothly.
Fig.8-18
Fig.8-19
Fig.8-20
Fig.8-21
Drive unit • Unit check
• Gear check
Process unit Check if the gear tooth flank is damaged.
Drive section Check if there is any dust between the gear and the shaft.
Check if the contact section between the gear and the shaft is worn
out.
Fig.8-22
Developer unit Check if there is any damage to the coupling.
3 2
Fig.8-23
EPU tray (process unit) Check that the slider of the drum unit side vertical duct works 8
properly. Check if the slider is damaged.
P. 4-117 "4.6.17 Drum unit side vertical duct"
Fig.8-24
Fig.8-25
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD format error: Operation of HDD key data fails.
[F100_1] HDD format error (HDD encryption key data damaged - one board)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD format error: Encryption key data of either the SYS board
or the SRAM are damaged.
Take appropriate countermeasures shown in the table below according to the messages displayed in
"SRAM" and "FROM".
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware, system software and application
is needed. (HS-49 Firmware Update mode)
P. 11-2 "11.2 Firmware Updating with USB Device"
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD format error: Encryption key data of both the SYS board
and the SRAM are damaged.
Take appropriate countermeasures shown in the table below according to the messages displayed in
"SRAM" and "FROM".
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware / system software and application
is needed. (HS-49 Firmware Update mode)
Classification Contents
Other service call Only the first two characters of the serial number are entered.
(The serial number is not completely entered.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 0: HDD connection error (HDD connection cannot be
detected.)
Sub-code 1: Root partition mount error (HDD formatting fails.)
Sub-code 2, 3: Partition mount error (The areas other than
those described in the F101_1 and F101_4 to F101_10 errors
are damaged.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 4: Partition mount error (The "/work" partition is
damaged.)
Sub-code 12: Partition mount error (File link error in the "/work"
partition)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 5: Partition mount error (The "/registration" partition is
damaged.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 6: Partition mount error (The "/backup" partition is
damaged.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 7: Partition mount error (The "/imagedata" partition is
damaged.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 8: Partition mount error (The "/storage" partition is
damaged.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 9: Partition mount error (The "/encryption" partition is
damaged.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 10: Partition mount error (The "/application" partition
is damaged.)
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 11: A file in the "/platform" partition is damaged.
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected.
Sub-code 13: A file in the "/imagedata" partition is damaged.
Classification Contents
Other service call HDD start error: HDD cannot become “Ready” state.
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in
the specified period of time.
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD.
HDD other error
[F106_0] Secure HDD error: Illegal disk replacement detected (Secure HDD Exchange to Normal
HDD)
[F106_3] Secure HDD error: Secure HDD authentication Admin Password generation error
Notes:
The following items will be deleted by performing HS-
73 Assist mode -> Format HDD.
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Spool Data (Print, Email reception)
• Template
HDD If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD.
If the equipment operation disabled after above step,
replace the HDD.
Notes:
The following items will be deleted by performing HS-
73 Assist mode -> Format HDD.
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Spool Data (Print, Email reception)
• Template
HDD If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD.
If the equipment operation disabled after above step,
replace the HDD.
8
Notes:
The following items will be deleted by performing HS-
73 Assist mode -> Format HDD.
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Spool Data (Print, Email reception)
• Template
• In case this error occurred after returning SRAM data for
SRAM cloning:
Copy the Secure HDD key from FROM to SRAM.
1. Perform HS-73 Assist mode.
2. Select “Key Backup / Restore”.
3. Check the status of the Secure HDD key on the Key/
Backup Restore menu.
4. Select [ADIkey] twice.
5. Check that copying of the Secure HDD key from the
FROM to SRAM is selected.
6. Press [Execute].
7. When the restoring of the encryption key is completed,
“Success” appears to the right-hand side of [ADIKey]
FROM.
8. After the operation has been completed, shut down the
equipment.
HDD If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD.
If the equipment operation disabled after above step,
replace the HDD.
Notes:
The following items will be deleted by performing HS-
73 Assist mode -> Format HDD.
• Message Log
• Job Log
• Spool Data (Print, Email reception)
• Template
HDD If the error persists even after above step, replace the HDD.
If the equipment operation disabled after above step,
replace the HDD. 8
Classification Contents
Other service call Key consistency error - Key consistency check on each key
data fails.
[F109_1] Key consistency error (SRAM encryption AES key data damage)
Classification Contents
Other service call Key consistency error - AES key data used for SRAM
encryption are damaged.
Classification Contents
Other service call Key consistency error - Public key data used for Integrity Check
are damaged.
Classification Contents
Other service call Key consistency error - Parameter used for HDD partition
encryption are damaged.
8
Take measures given in the following table according to the messages displayed in the SRAM and
FROM fields.
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware, system software and application
is needed. (HS-49 Firmware update mode)
Classification Contents
Other service call Key consistency error - The license data are damaged.
Take appropriate countermeasures shown in the table below according to the messages displayed in
the SRAM and FROM fields of LICENCE [F109_4].
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware, system software and application
is needed. (HS-49 Firmware update mode)
Classification Contents
Other service call Key consistency error - Encryption key for Secure HDD is
damaged.
Take appropriate countermeasures shown in the table below according to the messages displayed in
the SRAM and FROM fields of AGLENCKEY [F109_5] / AGLDECKEY [F109_5].
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware, system software and application
is needed. (HS-49 Firmware update mode)
Classification Contents
Other service call Key consistency error - Administrator password error for Secure
HDD authentication.
Take appropriate countermeasures shown in the table below according to the messages displayed in
the SRAM and FROM fields of Admin Password [F109_6].
Remarks:
If the error is not cleared, reinstallation of the system firmware, system software and application
is needed. (HS-49 Firmware update mode)
Label
[2BA1] A paper size or a color mode not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being
selected.
8
[3A70] Error of partial mail interruption
[4032] Exceeding the upper limit of the registration number for the sharing jobs
[4111] Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by department and user
management has reached 0.)
[4113] Quota over error (The number of the assigned pages set by department management has
reached 0.)
[4721] Connection Error of Multi Station Print (Unexpected combination of ROM version)
[6008] Failed to connect on External Role Base Access Control (LDAP) Server
[6011] User automatic registration failure (due to an upper limit of the user registration number)
[6033] Card related error: Invalid flag data (no room-entry data)
[71AC] File save error during certificate acquisition from SCEP server
[8102] MFP not able to contact the Access point with the specified SSID
[812A] Active Directory domain authentication error: Kerberos ticket authentication error
[0052] T1 Time-out
Classification Error item
Fax error The fax transmission has failed since NSF/DIS could not be
detected. (Memory transmission)
[00D5] T5 Time-out
[ 1-1 ] Check that FS-08-2561 (Drum surface potential control setting) is set to “2”.
Notes:
For 55ppm/65ppm/75ppm in which no VO sensor is installed, “0” is set for FS-08-2561.
[ 2 ] Check for abnormal contents (V0 sensor controlling / V0 sensor shutter closing)
and abnormal stations.
[ 2-1 ] Check the drum surface potential sensor controlling status: FS-05-2780 Sub-code 3.
0: Normally completed
1: Control paused
(due to an open cover, etc.)
2: Sensor abnormality detected
8
[ 2-2 ] Check the drum surface potential sensor shutter closing controlling status? FS-05-2789
Sub-code 3
0: Normally completed
1: Control paused
(due to an open cover, etc.)
2: Sensor shutter closing abnormality detected
* When any of the drum surface potential sensor controlling statuses is “2: Sensor abnormality
detected” Go to 3.
* When any of the drum surface potential sensor shutter closing controlling statuses is “2: Sensor
shutter closing abnormality detected” Go to 4.
[ 3 ] What to do for the drum surface potential sensor controlling status abnormality
Content: Incorrect measurement when the drum surface potential sensor shutter is opened
<Example>
The harness of the drum surface potential sensor is disconnected.
The drum surface potential sensor shutter is not opened.
The drum surface potential sensor is installed incorrectly.
Charging of the photoconductive drum is abnormal (e.g. abnormalities in the drum, main
charger, discharge LED, HVT board).
Are the harnesses of the troubled drum surface potential sensor connected? Are the boards
connected with the sensor correctly?
| Connector between the drum surface potential sensor and the V0S board
| Connectors CN308 and CN307 of the LGC board
| NO Reconnect the connector when it is disconnected. Then perform image
quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742) and check the controlling status.
YES
[ 3-1 ] If the drum surface potential sensor output is “0-30” or “1010-1020” in the grid bias
voltage of the target sensor, the drum surface potential sensor shutter may become
closed.
Is the shutter opened and closed smoothly when the arm of the drum shutter solenoid is moved
by hand and is the detecting element of the drum surface potential sensor (2 mm) seen
completely when the drum shutter is opened?
| NO If the sensor or the shutter is dirty, wipe off with soft pad or cloth.
| If a spring or any part connecting the solenoid and the shutter has been
| removed, reinstall it securely.
| Then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742) / check
| the controlling status” (described later).
|
| When an adjustment error occurs
| Replace the shutter and then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control
| (FS-05-2742) / check the controlling status” (described later).
If such sounds are not heard, replace the solenoid and then perform “4. Image quality closed-
loop control (FS-05-2742) / check the controlling status” (described later).
[ 3-2 ] If the drum surface potential sensor output is other than “0-30” and “1020-1020” in the
grid bias voltage of the target sensor
[ 4 ] What to do for the drum surface potential sensor shutter closing controlling
statuses abnormality
Content: Incorrect measurement when the drum surface potential sensor shutter is closed 8
<Example> The opened drum surface potential sensor shutter cannot be closed.
Repeat 2-1 above (sensor shutter not opened) and then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control
(FS-05-2742) / check the controlling status” (described later).
Procedure
1. If the value of the drum surface potential sensor control abnormalities counter is other than “0”, reset
the counter.
FS-08-2560 Sub-code 3
2. If the value of the drum surface potential sensor shutter closing control abnormalities counter is
other than “0”, reset the counter.
FS-08-2577 Sub-code 3
3. Select “1: Enabled” for the code FS-08-2561 (Drum surface potential sensor control setting).
4. Perform “Image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742)”.
5. If any abnormality is detected, the controlling status and the “ERROR” message shown below are
displayed after approx. 30 to 60 seconds.
Then check the content of the abnormality and the target process unit on the screen and then press
[CANCEL] at the bottom left of the screen.
* The mode returns to the test mode if the drum surface potential sensor control is normally
completed.
Upper row: Drum surface potential Lower row: Drum surface potential sensor
sensor controlling status shutter closing
<Contents> controlling status
0: Normally completed <Contents>
1: Control paused 0: Normally completed
(due to the opened cover or other reasons) 1: Control paused
2: Sensor abnormality detected (due to the opened cover or other reasons)
2: Sensor shutter closing abnormality detected
When any of the stations in the controlling status on the upper row is “2: Sensor abnormality detected”
while “ERROR” is being displayed Check the setting value of FS-08-2561 Go to 3.
When any of the controlling statuses on the lower row is “2” while “ERROR” is being displayed Go to
4.
When “ERROR” is not displayed and the mode returns to the test mode Go to 6.
When any of service calls CE10, CE20 and CE40 is displayed Go to 7.
[ 6 ] When “ERROR” is not displayed and the mode returns to the test mode
Print out a test chart (04-231: Secondary scanning direction - 33-gradation pattern). Is the
printed image normal?
| YES END
NO
See “Image quality control related troubleshooting” to resolve the problem.
[ 7 ] CE10, CE20 or CE40 is image quality control abnormality. See “Image quality
control related troubleshooting” to resolve these errors.
Turn ON the power of the equipment to start the unpacking operation by the software after No. 51of the
unpacking instructions.
This instruction prohibits any operation not described in the unpacking instruction, because the purpose
is to complete the setup of the equipment.
Therefore, if trouble of the equipment occurs during unpacking, it is necessary to forcibly shut down the
unpacking procedure.
When an error code or a service call is displayed after the unpacking procedure is interrupted, clear the
trouble referring to troubleshooting.
When the equipment has been shut down, starting the equipment with the setting code “FS-08-9022”
allows you to know the completed status before the forced termination.
For example, if 6 is displayed for the code FS-08-9022, this status means that the gamma adjustment
has been completed.
When the error has been cleared, restart the unpacking procedures from the status in which you shut
down the equipment.
Additionally, setting the code FS-08-9022 to 5 enables you to perform the gamma adjustment again.
Also, setting the code FS-08-9022 to 99 allows you to release the unpacking operation and to start the
equipment normally.
[ 1 ] If any abnormality in V0 sensor control is detected, the controlling status and the
“ERROR” message shown below are displayed approx. 30 to 60 seconds after
“Automatic image quality control initialization (FS-05-2742)” is performed. Then
check the content and the station of the abnormality on the control status and
then press [CANCEL] at the bottom left of the screen.
* When any of the drum surface potential sensor controlling statuses (display on the upper row) is “2:
Sensor abnormality detected”, drum surface potential sensor shutter closing controlling status will
not be identified. (The display on the lower row is “0: Normally completed”.)
Upper row: Drum surface potential Lower row: Drum surface potential sensor
sensor controlling status shutter closing
<Contents> controlling status
The contents same as FS-05-2780 sub-code <Contents>
3 The contents same as FS-05-2789 sub-code
0: Normally completed 3
1: Control paused 0: Normally completed
(due to an open cover, etc.) 1: Control paused
2: Sensor abnormality detected (due to an opened cover, etc.)
2: Sensor shutter closing abnormality detected
When any of the drum surface potential sensor controlling statuses (display on the upper row) is “2:
Sensor abnormality detected”, drum surface potential sensor shutter closing controlling status will not
be identified. (The display on the lower row is “0: Normally completed”.)
If the “Image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742)” is performed while “0: Disabled” is selected for
FS-08-2561 (Drum surface potential control setting), drum surface potential control measurement will
not be performed. However, the controlling status of the last drum surface potential sensor
measurement and “ERROR” are displayed.
(All status values on both upper and lower rows may be “0” and also “ERROR” may be displayed.)
When any of the controlling statuses on the upper row is “2” while “ERROR” is being displayed Go to
2.
When any of the controlling statuses on the lower row is “2” while “ERROR” is being displayed Go to
3.
When any of service calls CE10, CE20 and CE40 is displayed Go to 5.
[ 2 ] What to do for the drum surface potential sensor controlling status abnormalities
Content: Incorrect measurement when the drum surface potential sensor shutter is opened
<Example>
The harness of the drum surface potential sensor is disconnected.
The drum surface potential sensor shutter is not opened.
The drum surface potential sensor is installed incorrectly.
Charging of the photoconductive drum is abnormal (e.g. abnormalities in the drum, main
charger, discharge LED, HVT board).
Apply following measures respectively and perform “4. Image quality control initialization (FS-
05-2742) and checking controlling status” (described later).
Are the harnesses of the troubled drum surface potential sensor connected? Are the boards
connected with the sensor correctly?
| Connector between the drum surface potential sensor and the V0S board
| Connectors CN308 and CN310 of the LGC board
| NO Reconnect the connector when it is disconnected. Then perform “4. Image
| quality control initialization (FS-05-2742) and checking controlling status”
(described later).
YES
[ 2-3 ] Checking the drum surface potential sensor and the drum surface potential sensor
boards
Replace the drum surface potential sensor and perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control
(FS-05-2742) and checking controlling status” (described later).
Is the shutter opened and closed smoothly when the arm of the drum shutter solenoid is
moved manually, and is the detecting element of the drum surface potential sensor seen
completely when the drum shutter is opened?
| NO If the sensor or the shutter is dirty, wipe off with soft pad or cloth.
| If a spring or any part connecting the solenoid and the shutter is removed,
| install it securely.
| Then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742) and
| checking controlling status” (described later).
|
| When an adjustment error occurs
| Replace the shutter and then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control
(FS-05-2742) and checking controlling status” (described later).
YES
When an adjustment error occurs
Replace the drum and then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742) and
checking controlling status” (described later).
Replace the LGC board and then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742)
and checking controlling status” (described later).
When an adjustment error occurs
Replace the HVT board and then perform “4. Image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742)
and checking controlling status” (described later).
[ 3 ] What to do for the drum surface potential sensor shutter closing controlling
status abnormality
Content: Incorrect measurement when the drum surface potential sensor shutter is closed
<Example> The opened shutter cannot be closed.
Repeat steps 2-6 and 2-4 above (sensor shutter not opened) and then perform “4. Image quality control
initialization (FS-05-2742) and checking controlling status” (described later).
1. If the value of the drum surface potential sensor control abnormalities counter is other than “0”, reset
the counter.
FS-08-2560 Sub-code 3: K
2. If the value of the drum surface potential sensor shutter closing control abnormalities counter is
other than “0”, reset the counter.
FS-08-2577 Sub-code 3: K
3. Select “1: Enabled” for the code FS-08-2561 (Drum surface potential sensor control setting).
4. Perform “Image quality control initialization (FS-05-2742)”, refer to 1. for confirming the result, and
then apply necessary measures if there is any abnormality.
8.4.6 When the duplexing unit cover open display cannot be released
1. Is the duplexing unit opening/closing detection sensor (S64) working normally?
2. Check if any of the fuses (F201, F202, and F203) on the switching regulator has blown.
3. Replace the switching regulator.
4. If the fuse still blows even after the switching regulator is replaced, check if a harness connected
with the connector CN512 on the switching regulator is caught or short circuited. Replace the
harness if there is any abnormality.
8
8.4.7 Troubleshooting for one-time dongle
1. When the serial number is changed, options already installed (Meta Scan Enabler GS-1010,
External Interface Enabler GS-1020 and IPSec Enabler GP-1080) will be disabled.
2. When the serial number is changed, an F200 error occurs if the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-
1070, optional) is installed.
3. When you reinstall the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070, optional), follow the designated
reinstallation procedure (the same procedure as that of board replacement)
Fig.8-26
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
Fig.8-27
Adjustment
In case the edges are towards the front side from (B):
Turn the stopper on the right front side clockwise to lift the equipment. The exit position will be moved
towards the rear side by approx. 0.6 to 1.0 mm for each turn.
In case the edges are towards the rear side from (B):
Turn the stopper on the left front side clockwise to lift the equipment. The exit position will be moved
towards the front side by approx. 0.6 to 1.0 mm for each turn.
Fig.8-29
8
Fig.8-30
1. When this problem occurs in paper exiting to the upper exit section of the equipment, change the
setting of the destination to the lower exit section.
2. When this problem occurs in paper exiting to the lower exit section using the side exit tray (option:
KA-6551-ET), use the sub tray (service part).
- Service part: COV-SUB-TRAY-H38X (P-I: 203-24)
[ 2 ] Remaining of the trailing edge of the exiting paper (The trailing edge of the paper
does not fall onto the tray.)
During the use of B5-R size paper or an OHP film, if there is a problem such as the remaining of the
trailing edge of the paper at exiting, carry out the following procedure.
Fig.8-31
1. When this problem occurs in paper exiting to the upper exit section of the equipment, change the
setting of the destination to the lower exit section.
- Service part: COV-SUB-TRAY-H38X (P-I: 203-24)
[ 1 ] Symptoms
Stripe-shaped stains on the back side of the paper
Back side
approx. 75mm
2nd transfer roller pitch
[ 2 ] Measures
Carry out the enforced performing of image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742) or copy (or print)
one sheet of paper.
[ 1 ] The LCD screen does not display after the power has been turned ON.
1. General description
When the lamps on the control panel do not light or error codes are not displayed on the LCD screen
after the power has been turned ON, perform this troubleshooting.
8
[2] 12VA Power LED
Fig.8-32
3. Measures
When an error code is displayed, perform its troubleshooting.
If the LCD screen is turned OFF and an error code cannot be confirmed as a result, check the
lighting condition of each LED and perform the troubleshooting by following the status below.
Lighting
LED SYS power LED Troubleshooting
condition
Main Power LED ON - -
OFF ON The 5 VS power is not supplied to the
control panel.
• Check the connection of the harness
of the control panel.
• Check if there is no abnormality in
the parts of the control panel.
OFF The power is not supplied to the SYS
board.
• Check the connection of the power
harness of the SYS board.
• Check if there is no abnormality in
the switching regulator.
• Check if there is no abnormality in
the SYS board.
Lighting
LED SYS board status Troubleshooting
condition
Power LED OFF Waiting for the Check the connection of the switching
power supply regulator harness and the power supply
harness.
Fig.8-33
8
Fig.8-34
Fig.8-35
[A] [B]
Fig.8-36
If the dimensions are less than the above ones, perform the
adjustment according to the following procedure.
• Arrange the dimension A between the E-ring and the bushing
on the elevator shaft so that it becomes 1 mm or.
(1) Loosen the screw [1] and move the elevator shaft [2].
(2) Tighten the screw [1].
[2]
[1]
Fig.8-37
[3]
[4]
Fig.8-38
Fig.8-39
Dual Scan Wipe the guide of the dual scan document feeder with a dry cloth
Document Feeder or clean them with a well-squeezed cloth.
Fig.8-40
Original scanning Check if there is no abnormality in the original scanning section.
section
Back side DSDF-CCD module Wipe the slit glass of the DSDF-CCD module with a dry cloth or
clean it with a well-squeezed cloth.
Fig.8-41
Check if there is no abnormality in the DSDF-CCD module.
Notes:
Do not use liquids other than water (such as alcohol, organic solvents or neutral detergent).
When "Place Doc. Feeder in the down position" is displayed even if the DSDF or its cover is closed
appropriately, take the following measures.
Feeding direction 8
Fig.8-42
Feeding direction
Fig.8-43
The image distortion (dogleg image) shown upper occur on the leading or trailing edge at the back
side of the copied or scanned paper while the DSDF was used.
Fig.8-44
105 mm
Perform procedures 3
and 4.
1118 mm
Pitch: 1118mm
Feeding direction
(Ratio of once every 3
sheets of A3/LD paper)
Perform procedures 1,
2 and 3.
Fig.8-45
Feeding direction
Fig.8-46
Feeding direction
Fig.8-47
If the trouble is not solved at the step 2 and the step 3 or followings (excluding the parameter
adjustment) are performed, make sure to perform “Image quality closed-loop control” and then
“Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.
A B
Feeding direction
Fig.8-48
Moire
Approx.188mm
Feeding direction
Fig.8-49
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 126 mm behind the high density image.)
Shadow image
Approx. 126mm
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Fig.8-50
Toner offset (shadow image) sometimes appears at both edges of the paper when a wide-size sheet is
printed following the continuous printing of narrow-size ones or rotate sort-printing.
In such a case, change the setting of Wait between the printings of narrow-size and wide-size paper.
Notes:
• When the setting is changed, toner offset can be reduced; however, the performance (printing
speed) will also be lowered accordingly. Therefore, the setting should only be changed
depending on the occurrence frequency or corresponding to users' requests.
• The values below are the recommended ones. Therefore, adjust the values according to the
situation.
• Set the number of the sheets for FS-08-5455 so that the value is within the below ones.
08-5455-0 08-5455-1 08-5455-2, 08-5455-3 08-5455-4 08-5455-5
• Set the number of the sheets for FS-08-5355 so that the value is within the below ones.
08-5355-0 08-5355-4 08-5355-8, 08-5355-1 08-5355-5 08-5355-9,
08-5355-2 08-5355-6 08-5355-10, 08-5355-3 08-5355-7 08-5355-11
08-5355-12 08-5355-13 08-5355-14 08-5355-15 08-5355-16 08-5355-17
1. Combined job
Feeding direction
Fig.8-51
Feeding direction
Fig.8-52
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-53
Feeding direction
Fig.8-54
Feeding direction
Fig.8-55
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-56
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-57
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-58
8
(*1): Decrease the corresponding 2nd transfer bias output as follows depending on what happened,
and check if the residual image has changed and adjust the value accordingly.
Feeding direction
Fig.8-59
Feeding direction
Fig.8-60
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-61
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-62
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-63 8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-64
Feeding direction
Fig.8-65
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-66
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-67
Feeding direction
Fig.8-68
Feeding direction
Fig.8-69
8
Feeding direction
Fig.8-70
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Fig.8-72
Fig.8-73
Feeding direction
Fig.8-74
Type A Type B
Fig.8-75
2 types (A and B) of residual images are identified. The common phenomenon is an image fused on the
photoconductive drum one round before appears faintly on the halftone part of the next image.
* Decrease the corresponding 1st transfer bias output as follows according to the phenomena which
occurred, and check if the residual image has changed and adjust the value accordingly.
Thick paper 1, 2, 3, 4
Decrease the value of the code FS-05-2905-11 by 1 while you are checking how the residual image has
changed.
Feeding direction
8
Fig.8-76
1) Confirmation
This phenomenon may occur when 10 K sheets of paper with a low printing ratio (lower than 3%) are
being printed continuously in the 2-sheet intermittent mode.
When the image shown above appeared, the developer material in the developer unit is probably
decreasing. In this case, pull out the process unit and then take out the drum cleaner unit of the same
color as the image. Then visually check the developer sleeve in the developer unit of the corresponding
color if the layer of the developer material is formed evenly over the roller. If the layer of the developer
material on the area corresponding to the feathered image is thinner than that on the other areas or
totally lacking, replace the developer material.
However, the replacement of the developer material must be performed at the very end. Proceed to “2)
Investigating the cause / taking measures”.
Lack of the developer material layer on the The developer material has greatly decreased.
developer sleeve (rear side) Most of the surface of the mixer shaft is exposed.
Developer material
Fig.8-77 Fig.8-78
*2 The toner density is reset to the normal controlling level by replacing the developer material as the
last step. Therefore the only measure to be taken in this step is the correction of the main (separation)
pole position.
*3 How to correct the main (separation) pole position of the developer sleeve
Turn the pole position adjustment plate of the developer unit counterclockwise by 1 scale.
If the plate is adjusted to the end, turn it counterclockwise by the amount equivalent to 1 scale.
(Do not turn it more than 1 scale.)
Fig.8-79
Feeding direction
8
Fig.8-80
1) Confirmation
This phenomenon may occur when a large amount (10 K sheets or more) paper with a high printing
ratio (85% or higher) are being printed continuously.
When the image shown above appeared (the image area approx. 5 cm from the rear end is light or light
diagonal lines appear over the entire image), the developer material in the developer unit may greatly
increase. In this case, take out the developer unit of the same color as the image and then take off the
developer upper unit to check the amount of the developer material on the transport section under the
developer sleeve. If the amount of the developer material is extremely large, scoop up the developer
material with a sheet of paper or similar until the amount becomes proper.
After checking the amount, investigate the following:
If the developer material has greatly increased The amount of the developer material is proper
(rear side) (rear side)
Developer material
Developer material
Fig.8-81 Fig.8-82
Scraper Coupling
(for Developer sleeve)
Hole
Fig.8-83
<Procedure>
(1) Confirm the condition of the image tilting with a grid pattern.
(2) Take off the transfer belt unit.
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket of the transfer belt unit.
(4) To improve the degree of image tilting by 0.5 mm or less: Align the bracket to the upper
alignment position and secure it with 2 screws.
To improve the degree of image tilting by 0.5 mm or more: Align the bracket to the lower
alignment position and secure it with 2 screws.
Remarks:
Image tilting on the leading edge can be adjusted in the range of 1 mm or less by adjusting the
bracket of the TBU. (Note that the improvement volume may decrease depending on the
equipment.)
Upper Lower
Bracket
Fig.8-85
Feeding direction
Fig.8-86
Fig.9-1
Fig. 9-2
Fig. 9-3
Notes:
• When installing the flat cable [2], do not
push it in strongly.
• When installing the flat cable [2], be
careful not to insert it at an angle.
• Do not apply pressure to or damage the
edge of the flat cable [2].
Fig. 9-4
Fig. 9-6
(5) Remove 6 screws and take off the SYS
board [5].
Fig. 9-7
Fig. 9-2
Fig. 9-3
Notes:
• When removing the flat cable [2], change
the lever position so that the connector is
released, and remove the flat cable by
lifting it up slightly (approx. 7 degrees) as
shown in the right figure.
• When connecting the flat cable [2] to the
connector, insert the flat cable straightly
and lock it securely. Confirm that the tabs 9
are in the positions shown in the right
figure.
Fig. 9-4
Notes:
• When installing the flat cable [2], do not
push it in strongly.
• When installing the flat cable [2], be
careful not to insert it at an angle.
• Do not apply pressure to or damage the
edge of the flat cable [2].
Fig. 9-5
Fig. 9-7
(5) Remove 5 screws and take off the SYS
board case [9].
Fig. 9-8
Fig. 9-9
Fig. 9-10
Notes:
When disconnecting the flat cable [2],
release the lock by tilting the flap and
disconnect it.
Fig. 9-11
Fig. 9-12
Notes:
The LGC board to be installed differs Label
depending on the models. Due to this, before
replacing, be sure to check the color of the
identification label on the LGC board to
install the corresponding one in the
equipment.
• 55ppm: White
• 65ppm: Yellow / Green
• 75ppm: Pink
• 85ppm: Brown / Blue
Fig. 9-13
9.1.8 EEPROM
Fig. 9-14
Fig. 9-15
Notes:
When disconnecting the flat cable [3],
release the lock by tilting the flap and
disconnect it.
Fig. 9-16
(3) Release the harnesses from the harness
clamps shown in the figure.
Fig. 9-17
Fig. 9-18
(5) Remove 3 screws and take off the stay [4].
Fig. 9-19
(6) Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 2 screws
and release the bracket [5].
Fig. 9-20
Fig. 9-21
Fig. 9-22
(3) Remove 5 screws and take off the PFC
board [1].
Fig. 9-23
Fig. 9-24
Fig. 9-25
Fig. 9-26
Fig. 9-27
(4) Remove all the connectors that are
connected to the switching regulator [2].
9
Fig. 9-28
(5) Release the harness from 3 harness clamps.
Fig. 9-29
Fig. 9-30
Fig. 9-31
(3) Remove 5 screws and release 1 locking
support, and then take off the high-voltage
transformer [1].
Fig. 9-32
[1]
Fig. 9-33
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the FIL-AC
board [1].
[1]
Fig. 9-34
[1]
[1]
Fig. 9-35
[1]
Fig. 9-36
Fig. 9-37
9.1.17 IH board
Notes:
Be sure to unplug the power cable before starting this work.
Fig. 9-38
Fig. 9-39
(4) Remove 1 screw for each terminal and take
off 2 IH feed terminals [2].
Notes:
Securely tighten the fixing screw of the IH
feed terminals [2] so that they do not become
loose.
Fig. 9-40
(5) Remove 4 screws and take off the IH board
[3].
Fig. 9-41
Fig. 9-42
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the DRV
board [1].
Fig. 9-43
Fig. 9-44
• The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the SYS board and Lens unit. So, if their
replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time. Do not replace the SYS board
and the SRAM together.
• If both the LGC board and SYS board require replacement, replace them in the following procedure.
1. First, replace one of the board to be replaced.
2. Turn the power ON and confirm that “READY” is displayed.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Replace another board that requires replacement.
• When replacing the LGC board, remove the EEPROM on the old board, and then attach it to the
new board.
• When the HDD requires replacement, see P. 9-22 "9.2.3 Precautions and procedures when
replacing the HDD".
• When the SYS board requires replacement, see P. 9-26 "9.2.4 Precautions and procedures
when replacing the SYS board".
9
• When the Lens unit requires replacement, see P. 9-40 "9.2.8 Procedures and settings when
replacing the Lens unit".
• When SRAM requires replacement, see P. 9-30 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when
replacing the SRAM".
1. Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code FS-08-9065. You can also refer to the same
information by performing HS-75 [SMART Info].
Fig. 9-45
2. Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100 - F109 or F120 or F124 occurred).
Result
Description Diagnosis
ID VALUE
05 0 Low possibility of physical failure HDD
c5 0 replacement is
not required.
05 From 1 to 999 Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD HDD
c5 0 is recovered. replacement is
not required.
05 Any value High possibility of defective sector existence. HDD
c5 1 or more (There will be a possibility of physical failure replacement is
depending on the use of HDD.) recommended.
05 Either one is at least High possibility of physical failure HDD
c5 1000. replacement is
recommended.
05 All values are High possibility of physical failure (A HDD HDD
c5 displayed as “-------”. connector, harness or SYS board may be one of replacement is
the causes.) recommended.
4. Description of each ID
ID Name Meaning
01 Read Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
02 Throughput Performance This attribute is a measure of the throughput
performance.
03 Spin Up Time This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is
able to spin up from a spun down condition.
04 Spin Start/Stop Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin
ups from a spun down condition.
05 Re-allocated Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
reallocated sectors.
07 Seek Error Rate This is a measure of the seek error rate.
08 Seek Time Performance This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek 9
performance during normal online operations.
09 Power-On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or
minutes depending on disk manufacturer) the drive
has been on.
0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin
retries.
0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number of times the
drive has been turned on.
c0 Power off Retract Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
emergency unloads.
c1 Load Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
load/unloads.
c2 Temperature This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the
HDD.
c3 ECC On the Fly Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the
ECC On the Fly.
c4 Reallocation Event Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the
reallocation events.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
candidate sectors to be reallocated.
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable This attribute is a measure of the total number of
Sector Count uncorrectable sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of
(Rate) errors found in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8 Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
Notes:
"Over-range" is displayed if the number of digits acquired from the HDD exceeds the maximum
digits which can be displayed on the control panel; however, this does not indicate an error.
Start
Setting completed
Fig. 9-46
(2) Select "Function list for Maintenance" and then press [PRINT].
(2) Enter the password in the [ADMIN] tab and press [OK].
Notes:
Explain the procedure to the user (machine administrator) and ask him/her to enter his/her
password.
(4) Press [FUNCTION]. The “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list is printed out.
(1) Perform HS-74 [Revert Factory Initial Status HDD] and then press [OK].
(2) Select any of "LOW", "MEDIUM", "HIGH" or "SIMPLE" and then press [OK].
(9) When the Fax Board (GD-1370) is installed, perform [CUSTOM INITIALIZE] [INIT MEMORY]
and [CLEAR DATA] in the FS-11 FAX CLEAR MODE. Then turn the power OFF.
• When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with “Self-signed
certificate” of TopAccess.
- Country Name
- State or Province Name
- Locality Name
- Organization Name
- Organizational Unit Name
- Common Name
- Email Address
• When the wireless LAN is used, recreate its setting. (only when security with a certificate is used)
Also, upload the following certificate file with “Install Certificate for Wireless LAN” of TopAccess. 9
- CA certificate
- User certificate
(3) Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
(2) Press [ADMIN], enter the password, and then press [OK].
Notes:
Explain the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/
her password.
(3) Press [FAX] and then [TERMINAL ID] to set each item.
Start
Setting completed
Fig. 9-47
Notes:
*1 If the combination of the main memory and the SYS board has been changed in [B], be sure to
perform the calibration of the main memory at the next startup.
*2 [C] is required only for the equipment in which the Secure HDD has been installed.
(3) Install the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the selected license, in the equipment,
and then press [OK].
(5) After 10 to 40 seconds passes, the screen for notifying the success of performance is displayed.
Then press [OK]. If this screen is not displayed or the screen for notifying the failure of
performance is displayed, quit this operation by pressing [NO]/[CLOSE]. Then, check whether
the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the selected license, is installed in the
equipment.
(6) Check that the returned license is not displayed on the screen.
Tips:
If there are any other licenses to be returned, repeat from step (2).
If there is no more licenses to be returned, press [CLOSE], and then turn the power OFF.
(3) Install main memory (DIMM) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board). 9
(4) Install SRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
Notes:
When the combination of the main memory and the SYS board has been changed by replacing
either of them, it is necessary to perform the calibration of the main memory at the next startup.
To perform the calibration of the main memory, start up the equipment while pressing the
[ENERGY SAVER] button.
E.g.:
To start up HS Menu, turn the power ON by pressing the [POWER] button while pushing the
[HOME] and [START] buttons simultaneously.
(4) Wait until the restoring of the encryption key is completed. "Success" is displayed.
(5) Restart the equipment after the restoring is completed. If you want to perform the restoring of the
license, do not restart the equipment but perform from (2) in "[D] Restore encryption key".
(4) Wait until the restoring of the encryption key is completed. "Success" is displayed.
(5) Restart the equipment after the restoring is completed. If you want to perform the restoring of the
license, do not restart the equipment but perform from (2) in "[E] Restore license".
(4) Wait until the restoring of the license is completed. "Success" is displayed.
(5) After the restoring is completed, check that "OK" is indicated in "FROM License Status". Then,
restart the equipment.
(2) Update the version of scanner firmware with the USB device.
P. 11-2 "11.2 Firmware Updating with USB Device"
(3) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for returning the selected
license before replacing the equipment). Then press [OK].
(5) The screen for notifying that the installation will be started is displayed. Then press [YES].
(6) After 10 to 40 seconds have passed, the screen for notifying the success of the performance is
displayed. Then press [OK]. If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed,
quit this operation by pressing [NO]. Then check that the one-time dongle is installed properly in
the equipment.
(7) Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list.
Tips:
If there are any other licenses to be installed, repeat from step (2). If there are no other licenses
to be installed, press [CLOSE], and then turn the power OFF.
Notes:
If the security mode is changed from High Security to Low Security in the step "[A] Return
License", set the value of FS-08-8911 to "3" (High Security).
Start
Backup SRAM No
possible?
Yes
With backup No
data SRAM?
Yes
[A] Backup SRAM No
FROM data will be lost?
Yes
(*1)
[B] Return License
[D] Clear SRAM system [D] Clear SRAM system [D] Clear SRAM system
strage area strage area strage area
[E] Restore SRAM [F] Clear SRAM update Error flags [F] Clear SRAM update Error flags
Setting completed
Fig. 9-48
(3) Install the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the selected license, in the equipment,
9
and then press [OK].
(4) The Remove screen is displayed, then press [YES]. If this screen is not displayed, check
whether the one-time dongle is installed in the equipment properly.
(5) After 10 to 40 seconds passes, the screen for notifying the success of performance is displayed.
Then press [OK]. If this screen is not displayed or the screen for notifying the failure of
performance is displayed, quit this operation by pressing [NO]/[CLOSE]. Then, check whether
the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the selected license, is installed in the
equipment.
(6) Check that the returned license is not displayed on the screen.
Tips:
If there are any other licenses to be returned, repeat from step (2).
If there is no more licenses to be returned, press [CLOSE], and then turn the power OFF.
(2) When "SRAM Clear Mode" appears on the LCD, press the [Clear SRAM].
© 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD
9 - 31
(3) When "SRAM Format Completed" is displayed on the LCD, initializing is completed.
(2) When “SRAM Clear Mode” appears on the LCD screen, press [Set Serial Number].
(3) Key in the serial number printed on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment and
then press [OK].
(7) Turn the power OFF after the restoring of SRAM is completed.
Tips:
When the restoration is completed successfully, proceed to " P. 9-34 "[N] Initialize settings
when FAX Board (GD-1370) is installed".
(3) When “Operation Complete” is displayed on the LCD, clearing the flag is completed.
(4) Wait until the backup of the ADI key is completed. "Success" is displayed.
(4) Wait until the backup of the encryption key is completed. "Success" is displayed.
(5) Restart the equipment after the backup is completed. If you want to perform the backup of the
license, do not restart the equipment but perform from (3) in P. 9-33 "[I] Backup license
(FROM -> SRAM)".
(3) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for returning the selected
license before replacing the equipment). Then press [OK].
(5) The screen for notifying that the installation will be started is displayed. Then press [YES].
(6) After 10 to 40 seconds have passed, the screen for notifying the success of the performance is
displayed. Then press [OK]. If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed,
quit this operation by pressing [NO]. Then check that the one-time dongle is installed properly in
the equipment.
(7) Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list.
Tips:
• If there are any other licenses to be installed, repeat from step (2).
• If there are no other licenses to be installed, press [CLOSE], and then turn the power OFF.
(3) Install the removed LGC board's EEPROM into the new LGC board.
Start
Setting completed
Fig. 9-49
(3) Check whether the displayed destination (see the below figure) of the SRAM is the same as the
one in step (1).
Fig. 9-50
Tips:
If the destinations are different, initialize the SRAM with reference to the following procedure.
P. 9-30 "9.2.5 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM"
Fig. 9-51
(6) Perform "Destination display at SRAM initialization" (FS-08-9060), and check whether the same
destinations are displayed for the SRAM and the LGC board.
Fig. 9-52
L (0) H (1)
FS-05-2630
(2) Perform FS-05-2630 and then enter all the adjustment values written down in step (1).
9
(3) Reset the auto toner sensor.
1. Turn the power OFF.
2. Take off the developer unit.
P. 4-123 "4.6.24 Developer unit"
3. Discharge developer material in developer unit and make sure that the developer unit is
completely empty. Or prepare empty developer unit.
P. 4-126 "4.6.25 Developer material"
4. Install the empty developer unit to the equipment.
P. 4-123 "4.6.24 Developer unit"
5. Install the developer cartridge to the equipment.
6. Install the front cover.
P. 4-1 "4.1.2 Front cover"
7. Perform automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor (FS-05-2400).
8. Turn the power OFF.
9. Take off the front cover.
P. 4-1 "4.1.2 Front cover"
10.Take out all the developer cartridge and then install the sub-hopper.
P. 4-112 "4.6.11 Sub-hopper"
11. Install the front cover.
P. 4-1 "4.1.2 Front cover"
Notes:
• You can reset the auto-toner sensor by directly entering the adjustment values for FS-05-
2405-3 with the Adjustment mode data list, which has been printed during normal operation of
equipment such as when it is setup, when preventive maintenance (PM) is performed or
when developer material is replaced, etc.
(4) Perform the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (FS-05-2742)”.
(3) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board Lens unit (FS-05-
3209)”.
(4) Perform “Shading correction plate Automatic dust detection adjustment (FS-05-3218)”.
Firmware Code
System software 9900
System firmware 9930
Engine firmware 9901
Scanner firmware 9902
NIC firmware 9990
DF firmware 9903
PFC firmware 9940
Finisher firmware 9904
Hole punch firmware 9944
FAX board firmware(Line1) 9905
FAX board firmware(Line2) 9969
The installed ROM versions and the registered optional Electronic License Keys can be confirmed in
the list print mode following the procedure below.
(3) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for registering the selected
license), and then press [OK].
(5) The screen for notifying that the installation will be started is displayed. Then press [YES].
(6) After 10 to 40 seconds have passed, the screen for notifying the success of the performance is
displayed. Then press [OK]. If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed,
quit this operation by pressing [CLOSE]. Then check that the one-time dongle, which you used
for uploading the selected license, is installed in the equipment.
(7) Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list.
Tips:
If there are any other licenses to be returned, repeat from step (2). If there are no other licenses
to be returned, press [CLOSE], and then turn the power OFF.
(3) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for uploading the selected
license), and then press [OK].
(5) After 10 to 40 seconds have passed, the screen for notifying the success of the performance is
displayed. Then press [OK].
If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed, quit this operation by pressing
[CLOSE]. Then check that the one-time dongle, which you used for uploading the selected
license, is installed in the equipment.
(10) Install the one-time dongle in the equipment (the one which you used for returning the selected
license before replacing the equipment). Then press [OK].
(12) The screen for notifying that the installation will be started is displayed. Then press [YES].
(13) After 10 to 40 seconds have passed, the screen for notifying the success of the performance is
displayed. Then press [OK]. If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed,
quit this operation by pressing [NO]. Then check that the one-time dongle is installed properly in
the equipment.
(14) Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list.
Tips:
If there are any other licenses to be installed, repeat from step (9). If there are no other licenses 9
to be installed, press [CLOSE], and then turn the power OFF.
10.1.1 Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used waste toner box.
(1) Placing an Order
There are two ways to place an order.
• FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
• E-mail (E-mail body + TIFF image)
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
• Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
Fig.10-1
(5) The keyboard appears upon your touching the entry box for a password. Enter the administrator
password and then press [OK] or [CLOSE].
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig.10-2
Fig.10-3
Fig.10-4
Fig.10-5
10
Fig.10-6
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of SUPPLIER to set the required item.
Fig.10-7
Fig.10-8
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
(20) Press [OK] to register and complete the order information setting.
10
Fig.10-9
Fig.10-10
Fig.10-11
Fig.10-12
AUTO ORDER
Notes:
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following 08 Setting Mode.
Fig.10-13
Fig.10-14
Fig.10-15
Fig.10-16
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in “Notify Date 1” or “Notify Date 2” and press [OK].
10
Fig.10-17
Fig.10-18
Fig.10-19
*2. "FullColor:0" and "TwinColor:0" do not change. The value for "Black:" is the counter value.
*3. "TwinColor:0" does not change. The values for "FullColor:" and "Black:" are the counter values.
Fig.10-20
10.2.1 Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
• PM counter notification
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
10.2.2 Setting 10
Notes:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
If the menu display of this function is disabled (not displayed), set it to be enabled (displayed) with the
following code.
Fig.10-21
Fig.10-22
Fig.10-23
10
Fig.10-24
Fig.10-25
Press [FAX NUMBER], key in the FAX number and then press [OK].
Fig.10-26
Fig.10-27
You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing [SEND
NOW].
• Day of the week ([SUN] to [SAT])
Pressing [SUN] to [SAT] of the desired day makes transmission on every specified day. More
than one day can be selected.
* This does not affect the settings of “Notify Date 1” and “Notify Date 2”.
Fig.10-28
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in “Notify Date 1” or “Notify Date 2” and press [OK].
Fig.10-29
Notes:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following 08 Setting Mode.
Fig.10-30
Fig.10-31
1 Date
3 Serial number
5 Supplier information
6 Customer information
26 History error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
27 Toner remaining quantity (Black)
10
Sheet 1
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
Fig.10-32
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
22 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 28
23 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 29
24 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 30
25 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 31
26 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 32
27 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 33
DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER
08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:28 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
(*2)
08/04/12 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/03/15
08/02/25
22:23
11:12
F110
F110
00000000
00000000
08/04/13
08/04/13
16:44
16:44
F110
F110
00000000
00000000 10
35 TONER INFORMATION
Fig.10-33
1 Date
3 Serial number
5 Customer information
7 Supplier information
34 History of error
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
35 Toner remaining quantity (Black)
Fig.10-34
Fig.10-35
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
5. Supplier information
6. Customer information
7. Service technician information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
16. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (Full color)
17. Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
18. Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
20. Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
21. Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
22. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
23. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
24. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Developer material (K)]
25. PM count present value / PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
26. PM count setting value / PM driving count setting value [Other parts]
10
Sheet 1
Fig.10-36
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
22 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 28
23 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 29
24 SETTING VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 30
25 CURRENT VALUE (K-EPU DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS PAGES) : 00000000 31
26 SETTING VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 SETTING VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 32
27 CURRENT VALUE (K-DEV PAGES) : 00000000 CURRENT VALUE (OTHERS DRIVE COUNTS) : 00000000 33
DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ERROR CODE COUNTER
08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:28 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/04/12 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
(*2)
10
08/03/15 22:23 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
08/02/25 11:12 F110 00000000 08/04/13 16:44 F110 00000000
Fig.10-37
39 Point Of Destination 0
40 Used History
41 Developer Counter 00000000
42 Developer Driving Time 00000000
43 Drum Driving Time 00000000
Fig.10-38
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
5. Customer information
6. Service technician information
7. Supplier information
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12. Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
13. Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
14. Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
15. Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
16. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (Full color)
17. Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
18. Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
19. Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
20. Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
21. Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
22. PM count setting value [EPU (K)]
23. PM count present value [EPU (K)]
24. PM driving count setting value [EPU (K)]
25. PM driving count present value [EPU (K)]
26. PM count setting value [Developer material (K)]
27. PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
28. PM driving count setting value [Developer material (K)]
29. PM driving count present value [Developer material (K)]
30. PM count setting value (Other parts)
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A © 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 40
31. PM driving count present value (Other parts)
32. PM driving count setting value (Other parts)
33. PM driving count present value (Other parts)
34. History of error
35. Toner cartridge information
36. Toner near-empty counter
37. Setting value of toner cartridge rotation time counter
38. Current value of toner cartridge rotation time counter
39. Destination setting of toner cartridge
40. Usage History
41. Current value for total printed sheets of developer
42. Current value for developer driving time
43. Current value for drum driving time
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
10
8 Supplier:
Name : SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail : [email protected]
Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
9 Customer:
Name : CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
E-Mail : [email protected]
Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
10 Service Technician:
Number : svc12
Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail : [email protected]
12 Toner Information
Fig.10-39
3 Serial number
6 Error code
8 Supplier information
9 Customer information
11 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
12
46 Toner remaining quantity (Black)
10
11.1 Overview
When you want to update the firmware to the latest one or the equipment becomes inoperable due to
some defect in the firmware, updating can be performed as follows.
Equipment
Options
Notes:
• Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC board,
scanning section control PC board and FAX board. The latest version of the firmware at the time
of delivery is written on the DSDF control PC board and finisher control PC board.
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, check the other firmware
version used and then update with a corresponding suitable version.
• "Can't fetch Ver." is displayed in the Installed Version field when the version of the installed
firmware cannot be acquired properly. For example, if [HS-49] is carried out without your
performing the normal startup after updating, this message will appear for some firmware.
USB device
5508A_8508A
T385SF0Wxxxx.tar
TH385MWW.xx
TH370SLGWW.xxx
T385HD0Wxxxx.tar
H616DFWW.xxx
TH385FWW.xxx
FAXH625Txxx
FIN1111T.xxx
FIN1112T.xxx
PUN6106T.xxx
T385NIC0Wxxxx.tar
Signature_N_5508A.sig
compatibility_list.txt
Fig.11-1
USB device
5508A_8508A
T385SFPWxxxx.tar
T385HDPWxxxx.tar
Fig.11-2
USB device
5508A_8508A
T385SFdWxxxx.tar
T385HDdWxxxx.tar
Fig.11-3
(3) Connect the USB device [1] to the USB port [2] on the right upper cover.
[2]
[1]
Fig.11-4
Fig.11-5
Notes:
The update file which is selected must be included in the model specific folder. There is no 11
problem if updated files of different types are mixed.
Fig.11-6
Fig.11-7
Notes:
• The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB device in the
following conditions.
Standard update
Item Condition (xxx is version)
SYSTEM FIRMWARE (OS DATA) T385SF0Wxxxx.tar is written.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HDD DATA) T385HD0Wxxxx.tar is written.
ENGINE FIRMWARE TH385MWW.xxx is written.
SCANNER FIRMWARE TH370SLGWW.xxx is written.
PFC FIRMWARE TH385FWW.xxx is written.
DSDF FIRMWARE H616DFWW.xxx is written.
NIC FIRMWARE T370NIC0Wxxxx.tar is written.
FAX FIRMWARE FAXH625TAxx is written.
(When GD-1370 is connected.)
FINISHER FIRMWARE FIN1111T.xxx is written. (When MJ-1111 is connected.)
FIN1112T.xxx is written. (When MJ-1112 is connected.)
PUNCH FIRMWARE PUN6106T.xxx is written.
(When MJ-6106 is connected.)
Patch update
Item Condition (xxx is version)
SYSTEM FIRMWARE (OS DATA) T385SFPWxxxx.tar is written.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HDD DATA) T385HDPWxxxx.tar is written.
Error
Error message Cause
number
01 Model specific update program No update file of this equipment
XXXXXXXXXXXX is not stored. exists in the USB storage.
Item Remarks
SYSTEM FIRMWARE(OS DATA) Updating System firmware
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (HDD DATA) Updating System software
ENGINE FIRMWARE Updating Engine firmware
SCANNER FIRMWARE Updating Scanner firmware
PFC FIRMWARE Updating PFC software
DSDF FIRMWARE Updating DSDF firmware
NIC FIRMWARE Updating NIC firmware
FAX FIRMWARE Updating FAX firmware 11
FINISHER FIRMWARE Updating Finisher firmware
PUNCH FIRMWARE Updating Punch firmware
(10) Check that [Automatic Initialization] is displayed and then remove the USB device.
[C] Adjustment
Perform the adjustment of the equipment.
11
Firmware Code
System software 9900
System firmware 9930
Engine firmware 9901
Scanner firmware 9902
NIC firmware 9990
DF firmware 9903
PFC firmware 9940
Finisher firmware 9904
FAX board firmware(Line1) 9905
FAX board firmware(Line2) 9969
12.1.2 Precautions
• When the Security HDD is initialized or replaced, back up the SRAM data afterwards.
• It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform restore. Registered / set data are
lost.
• The USB device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data cloning operation
with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port) and its
capacity is 1GB or more.
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Implementers
Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-only)
The USB device should be formatted in the FAT16 or FAT32. (Correct operation cannot be
guaranteed if it is formatted in NTFS/exFAT.)
- Most of the common USB device are compliant with the above specifications and are therefore
applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were originally developed to be
used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and thus operations exclusively
with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore, the user must thoroughly check
12
in advance whether there will be any problem in operating with this equipment when adopting
one of these devices.
• The USB device compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data cloning.
• Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable memory
card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use them for this
operation.
• Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do not use
the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
• Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different,
update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
• Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
• Delete the backed up data in the USB device after the data cloning.
Filename Remark
E.g.: When backup was performed at 13:59 on
Modelname_MFPSerialNo_yyyy-MM-dd_hh-mm October 1st, 2016.
Txxx_CUK911379_2016-10-01_13-59
(2) Connect the USB device [1] to the USB port [2] on the right upper cover.
[2]
[1]
Fig.12-1
(5) "Backup successfully done" is displayed on the LCD when the backup has been properly
completed.
(2) Connect the USB device [1] to the USB port [2] on the right upper cover.
[2]
[1]
Fig.12-2
(4) Enter the password which has been set in (8) of "[A] Backup procedure", and press [OK].
(5) Enter the serial number of the equipment and press [OK].
Notes:
Use the serial number given on the label attached to the rear cover for the entry.
(6) "Restore successfully done Restart the MFP" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restoring
has been properly completed.
12
Fig.12-3
In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following items. After confirming and solving the
problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.
• Does the USB device meet the conditions being used for this cloning?
• Is the updated program file written on the USB device properly?
• Is the USB device installed properly?
• Is the USB device or the equipment damaged?
Backup
Display content Error content
USB device not detected The USB device has not been installed.
SRAM Device Not Connected The SRAM has not been installed.
Backup not created Creation of the Backup file of data of the SRAM has
been failed.
Encryption Failed An encryption of the backup file has been failed.
password Not Appended to Backup Addition of the encryption password has been failed.
MFP Serial Number Not Set Acquisition of the MFP Serial No. has been failed.
Restore
Display content Error content
USB device not detected The USB device has not been installed.
SRAM Device Not Connected The SRAM has not been installed.
Invalid Backup File The SYS board has not been recognized.
No Backup File Exists Backup file has not existed in the USB device.
Invalid password An incorrect password has been entered.
Decryption Failed Decoding of the backup file has been failed.
12
12.2.2 Precautions
• A clone file created by the following MFPs can be installed in this equipment.
e-STUDIO2010AC/2510AC
e-STUDIO2515AC/3015AC/3515AC/4515AC/5015AC
e-STUDIO5516AC/6516AC/7516AC
e-STUDIO2018A/2518A/3018A/3518A/4518A/5018A
e-STUDIO5518A/6518A/7518A/8518A
e-STUDIO2000AC/2500AC
e-STUDIO2505AC/3005AC/3505AC/4505AC/5005AC
e-STUDIO5506AC/6506AC/7506AC
e-STUDIO2008A/2508A/3008A/3508A/4508A/5008A
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
e-STUDIO3508LP/4508LP/5008LP
e-STUDIO2050C/2550C
e-STUDIO2555C/3055C/3555C/4555C/5055C
e-STUDIO2555CSE/3055CSE/3555CSE/4555CSE/5055CSE
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
e-STUDIO207L/257/307/357/457/507
e-STUDIO557/657/757/857
e-STUDIO307LP
e-STUDIO287CS/347CS/407CS
e-STUDIO287CSL/347CSL
e-STUDIO477S/527S
e-STUDIO477SL
e-STUDIO2040C/2540C/3040C/3540C/4540C
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C
e-STUDIO206L/256/306/356/456/506
e-STUDIO256SE/306SE/356SE/456SE/506SE
e-STUDIO556/656/756/856
e-STUDIO556SE/656SE/756SE/856SE
e-STUDIO306LP
• When a clone file created by this equipment is installed in another one, confirm the installation ability
by referring to the Service Manual for the target model.
• When a clone file created by another unit of the equipment is installed in this one, settings and
information about the functions which are not supported by this equipment will be disregarded.
• When cloning of user information is carried out by means of this function, ask your users to change
the setting to [Enable] of [User Information Cloning] from [Administration] - [Setup] - [General
settings] - [Device Information] via TopAccess.
• When cloning of the administrator password is carried out by means of this function, ask your users
to change the setting to [Enable] of [Administrator's Password Cloning] from [Administration] -
[Setup] - [General settings] - [Device Information] via TopAccess.
• Be sure to use a USB storage device which satisfies the conditions described in P. 12-1 "12.1.2
Precautions".
• Delete a clone file stored in the USB storage device after the cloning.
12.3.2 Precautions
When the data encryption function is set to be enabled, the data saved in the HDD before the
encryption has been performed cannot be retrieved. Therefore when data encryption function needs to
be enabled after the installation of the equipment, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before
setting this function and then recover them after the setting.
• To ensure security, ask the user (machine administrator) to back up or restore the user’s data
and information in the HDD. A service technician can back up or restore them only when the
user (machine administrator) permits it.
• Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be left only on printouts.
When the data encryption function is enabled, FS-08-9113 (Screen setting for automatic energy saver/
automatic power OFF) is automatically set to “0: OFF”.
Start
Setting completed
Fig.12-4
12
(2) Select "Function list for Maintenance" and then press [PRINT].
(2) Press [ADMIN], enter the password, and then press [ENTER].
- Country/Region Name
- State or Province Name
- Locality Name
- Organization Name
- Organizational Unit Name
- Common Name
- Email Address
• When the wireless LAN is used, recreate its setting. (only when security with a certificate is used)
Also, upload the following certificate file with ”Security” of TopAccess.
- CA certificate
- Device certificate
(3) Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
(2) Press [ADMIN], enter the password, and then press [ENTER].
(3) Press [FAX] and then [TERMINAL ID] to set each item.
Fig.12-5
12
• To have the equipment enter the High Security Mode, the Data Overwrite Enabler GP-1070
(optional) is required. Confirm that this option is installed in advance. Follow the Unpacking
Instructions to install it.
• To avoid physical security problems, such as hardware removal or inappropriate disassembly at the
installation site, take all necessary measures, such as checking who enters and leaves the site.
• Confirm that no received fax data or print jobs in progress exist. If there are any, be sure to print
them all out before entering the High Security Mode.
• The HDD is initialized in the High Security Mode. Be sure first to back up user data such as
documents, Address Book, templates or fax settings using the export function or the backup/restore
utility of the TopAccess. Refer to items noted in P. 12-8 "12.3 AES Data Encryption Function
Setting".
• Make a note of the settings on the Administration tab page of the TopAccess in advance.
• Compatibility of cloning data is lost between the High Security Mode and the normal mode;
therefore, cloning data cannot be imported.
Compatibility
Downloaded from Downloaded to
of cloning data
Normal mode Normal mode Yes
Normal mode High Security Mode No
High Security Mode Normal mode No
High Security Mode High Security Mode Yes
(2) A key-shaped icon appears at the bottom of the touch panel, indicating that it is now in the High
Security Mode.
(3) Press [COUNTER] on the control panel. If a key-shaped icon, indicating that the HDD data are
being encrypted, a paper-shaped icon indicating that the Data Overwrite Enabler is operating
normally and the version name of the installed system ROM (SYS V1.0) are displayed on the top
right of the counter menu, this means the mode is operating normally.
• When a self-diagnostic mode is started in the High Security Mode, an authentication screen
appears. Enter the default user name and password as follows:
Default user name: service
Default password: #1048#
• If a password change screen appears, reset the password according to the rules below.
- It must not include the user name.
- It must be a combination of letters of the alphabet and numbers.
- It must be 6 characters or more. (Maximum 64 characters)
- The same character must not be repeated 4 times within the new password.
- The old and the new passwords must not be the same.
• When the equipment is shifted to the High Security Mode, the contents for some codes will be
changed as below.
- The default value is changed.
- The settings cannot be changed.
- Some setting values cannot be selected.
For details, refer to the "Self-diagnostic code list" (separate document).
• The HDD is initialized (and the saved user data are deleted) when the equipment returns to the
normal mode from the High Security Mode. Be sure to back up user data before having it do so.
• In the above case, the password is not reset. The password setting can be changed with the code
FS-08-8919.
• After the equipment enters the High Security Mode, ask the administrator for the equipment to select
[FULL] and perform the Integrity check manually.
12
13.1 Outline
This specification describes the interface between external counters, such as Coin Controller and Key
copy counter.
13.2 Signal
13.2.1 Connector
• Connector on the LGC board: CN306 (JST-made B20B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V)) (Coin Controller)
• Connector on the SYS board: CN118 (JST-made B7B-PH-SM4) (Coin Controller)
[ 1 ] Settings
1. Set the value of FS-08-9016 to "1" or "5".
2. Harness kit: GQ-1280
[ 2 ] Pin Layout
Notes:
• Do not connect inductive loads to CTRON, such as a mechanical counter or a relay coil.
1. LGC Board
Pin Signal
I/O Function Voltage level Remarks
No. name
1-4 - - - - Not connect
5 Power +24V 24V line DC24V+10%, -5%
6 Out CTRON Total Counter On Signal Open Collector L: ON
IO (Max): 500mA
7 In CTRCNT Copy permission Signal L=0V, H=DC3.3V L: Allowed
1 *1
13
8 Out MCRUN Ready to Copy Signal Open Collector L: Operating
IO (Max): 40mA
9 Out EXTCTR Exit Sensor On Signal Open Collector L: ON
IO (Max): 40mA
10 GND PG Power ground 0V
11 - 18 - - - - Not connect
19 Power +5V (Sleep) 5V line DC5.1V At the sleep mode:
OFF
20 - - - - Not connect
*1: When the coin controller outputs the CTRCNT signal, the controller should be driven by means of
an open collector or open drain to prevent the inflow of current to the equipment.
Pin Signal
I/O Function Voltage level Remarks
No. name
1 Out LARGE / Paper size Signal Open Collector L: Large size
SMALL IO (Max): 20mA
2 - - - - Not connect
3 - - - - Not connect
4 - - - - Not connect
5 - - - - Not connect
6 GND GND Signal Ground 0V
7 - - - - Not connect
<CTRON>
OFF
ON
Fixed time
Fig.13-1
<MCRUN>
OFF
ON
Fixed time
<CTRON>
OFF
ON Fixed time
<EXTCTR>
OFF
ON
Fig.13-2
Fig.13-3
13
[ 1 ] Settings
1. Set the value of FS-08-9016 to "3".
2. Harness kit: -
[ 2 ] Pin Layout
Notes:
• Use 24V supplied from the main equipment as power for the output signals (KCTRON) from
the transistor.
1. LGC Board
Pin Signal
I/O Function Voltage level Remarks
No. name
1 GND SG Signal Ground 0V
2 In CTRCNT Copy permission L=0V, H=DC3.3V L: Allowed
Signal 1 *1
3 Power +24V 24V line DC24V+10%, -5%
4 Out KCTRON Mechanical Counter On Open Collector L: ON
Signal IO (Max): 500mA
5 - 20 - - - - Not connect
*1: When the coin controller outputs the CTRCNT signal, the controller should be driven by means of
an open collector or open drain to prevent the inflow of current to the equipment.
2. SYS board
Do not connect to the SYS board.
<KCTRON>
Single count OFF
ON
Fixed time
Fig.13-4
FS-08-9016
0: No external counter (Default)
1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card (For Japan only)
3: Key copy counter
5: Coin controller supporting mixed-size
13.3.2 Setting value change and restrictions when using the Card
Controller
1. Setting value
- FS-08-9016 (Externally installed counter): Set to “2” (Copy key card).
- FS-08-9017 (Setting for counter installed externally): It should be charged precisely according to
the usage.
Example: To charge only when copies are made, set to “1”.
- FS-08-6011 (Definition setting of large sized paper): Set to "0" if only A3 and LD are regarded as
large size. Set to "1" if B4, LG, FOLIO and COMP are done so as well.
13.3.3 Setting value change and restrictions when using the coin
controller
FS-08-9016 (Externally installed counter): Set to "1" (Coin controller) or "5" (Coin controller supporting
mixed-size).
Notes:
• Mixed-size jobs will be supported by setting to "5". The switching process of the size signal is
carried out for each page.
• Be sure to make the following charge settings appropriately according to the usage.
- FS-08-9017 (Setting for counter installed externally): To charge only when copies are
made, set to "1".
- FS-08-6011 (Definition setting of large sized paper): Set to "0" if only A3 and LD are
regarded as large size. Set to "1" if B4, LG, FOLIO and COMP are to be so as well.
13
14
CN506
FUSER UNIT
AC-OUT-L
1 HRNS-LVPS-IH2-H380 HRNS-LVPS-IH-H380
AC-OUT-N Fuser belt thermostat
3
J855
(THMO4)
CN505 J862 J856 J856 J1101
HRNS-MAINSW-H380 AC-N IH
2 2 1A 1B 1 1
CN504
J860 J858 CN503 AC-L IH Q1
AC-N(OUT) Q2 AC-OUT-N 1 1 2A 2B 2 2
4 1 1 2
AC-Live(OUT) Q1 AC-OUT-L J1002 IH INTERLOCK
2 3 3 4
MAIN-SW AC-N(IN) AC-IN-N (SW4)
3 2 2 1
(SW1) AC-Live(IN) AC-IN-L
1 4 4 3
CN562
J859 J857 CN509 AC-L IH
AC-IN
1 1 1 CN563
24V INTERLOCK J861 AC-N IH
PWA-F-IH
AC-OUT
LVPS
(SW2) 2 2 3
HRNS-LGC-FUS-H380
CN565
IH COIL
IH-COIL
CN564
FG
PWA-H-FIL
INLET 1
CN525 CN523
(AC-IN) LVPS-Neutral AC-N
3
HRNS-INLET-FIL-H380 HRNS-FIL-LVPS-H380
CN903 J790
PWA-H-DAMP
AC-L(SCN)
2
AC-N(SCN)
2 2 Scaner Damp Heater
HRNS-LVPS-MAINSW2-H380J 5 1 1 (DH1)
CN506
AC-OUT-L
1 HRNS-LVPS-IH2-H380 HRNS-LVPS-IH-H380 Fuser belt thermostat
AC-OUT-N
3 (THMO4)
CN505 J862 J856 J856 J855 J1101
HRNS-MAINSW-H380 AC-N IH
2 2 1A 1B 1 1
CN504
J860 J858 CN503 AC-L IH Q1
AC-N(OUT) Q2 AC-OUT-N 1 1 2A 2B 2 2
4 1 1 2
AC-Live(OUT) Q1 AC-OUT-L J1002 IH INTERLOCK
2 3 3 4
MAIN-SW AC-N(IN) AC-IN-N (SW4)
15
3 2 2 1
(SW1) AC-Live(IN) AC-IN-L
1 4 4 3
CN562
J859 J857 CN509 AC-L IH
AC-IN
1 1 1 CN563
24V INTERLOCK J861 AC-N IH
PWA-F-IH
AC-OUT
LVPS
(SW2) 2 2 3
HRNS-LGC-FUS-H380
CN565
IH COIL
IH-COIL
CN564
FG
PWA-H-FIL
INLET 1
CN525 CN523
(AC-IN) LVPS-Neutral AC-N
3
HRNS-INLET-FIL-H380 HRNS-FIL-LVPS-H380
Fig.15-1
PWA-H-LGC PWA-H-LGC
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
10
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
CN331
CN332
CN315
LSU UNIT
CN314 A
CN314 B
HRNS-LGC-EPU-H385 HRNS-LDRK-H380
+3.3VSW
PFCWDEN
RSTART
PSTPR
PFCSTS
PFCCMD
PFCCRDY
PFCSRDY
SG
PFCRST
SG
3.3VB
3.3V
SJUMCV
FRTCV
5.1VB
SG
24VD3
PG
24VD3
PG
24VD3
PG
24VD2
PG
ADCOV
RYINCOV
SG
SG
UTRYFL
UEXSN
EXTSTS
RLY1SN
FEDSN0
FEDSN2
FEDSN1
FEXSTS
RGSTS
24VCHK
TR2JAM
4 42
NC
J813
HRNS-LGC-PFC-H385
NC
IMGLIFE
IHSYNC0J
AIVSYNC0J
BIVSYNC0J
SG
CLVDSDT4P
CLVDSDT4N
SG
CLVDSCLKP
CLVDSCLKN
CLVDSDT3N
CLVDSDT2P
CLVDSDT2N
SG
KLVDSCLKN
SG
SG
SG
KLVDSDT1N
SG
CIVSYNC0J
DIVSYNC0J
SG
PLLCONF0
SG
CBSY-0J
SACK-0J
SBSY-0J
CACK-0J
SG
CMD-0J
SERR-0J
STS-0J
CERR-0J
SG
PWREN-0J
SG
LGCEN-1J
SYSRST-0J
SG
3.3VLPS
PLFFN 5 41
2 3
HRNS-LGC-SYS2-H385
HRNS-LGC-SYS1-H385
A LSU-FAN-MOT-F A
CN350 B
CN351
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NC
10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
+24VD
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
B16 NC
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
6 40
CN350 A
M (F22) 1 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SGND
10
11 SG
12 CLVDSDT3P
13
14 SG
15
16
17 SG
18 CLVDSDT1P
19 CLVDSDT1N
20 SG
21 KLVDSDT4P
22 KLVDSDT4N
23
24 KLVDSCLKP
25
26
27 KLVDSDT3P
28 KLVDSDT3N
29
30 KLVDSDT2P
31 KLVDSDT2N
32
33 KLVDSDT1P
34
35
36
37
38
39 PLLCONF1
40
10
11
12
13
14 MMPI-1J
15 SG
16
17 SG
18
19
20
NC 7 39
CN130
CN132
5 SGND
8 38
HRNS-SIDE-430
PWA-H-PFC 9 KSH1 37
KENABL
10 36
PWA-F-SYS J788 J808 11 KSH2 35
HRNS-SCN-MOT-210 SG SG SGND
FEED-COV-SNR 3 1 3 6 12 34
SJUMCV SJUMCV
(S114) 2 2 2 7 13 SGND 33
CN124 +5V 3.3VF AGND
HRNS-PFC-UPR-H380 HRNS-UEXTSN-430 +A 1 3 1 8 14 32
1 1 HRNS-LED-430 KDTA1-0
NC SCAN-MOT 15 31
CN365 A J728 J775 -A 2 (M1) 16 KDTA1-1 30
SG HRNS-SCN-ADF-373 HRNS-DSDF-SCIF-H616 J6 2 3 AGND
A1 6 1 3 UP-EXIT-SNR -B CN568 J899 17 29
HRNS-RLY1-SOL-430 HRNS-RLY-H380 HRNS-DRV-RLY-H380 HRNS-PFC-UPR-H380 UEXSEN M JAMLED
Bridge Unit A2 5 2 2 1 3 6 2 1 2 9 18 AGND 28
(S61) NC KDTA2-0
+5V 1 CN71 2 5 PWA-F-LED 1 2 1 SG 10 19 27
CN537 CN367 A3 4 3 CN122 J12 +B
J678 J625 RESET RST-SC 3 4 4 KDTA2-1
NC NC NC NC EXM2PH J776 1 11 11 11 20 26
1 9 CN539 A 14 1 NC 4 AGND
2 15 SG 21 25
NC NC RLYDET 13 EXMDIR 2 A4 3 4 3 UP-EXIT-FULL-SNR 2 AGND
2 8 1 16 RLYDET A1 UTRYFL DFLMPON LMPON 5 HRNS-SCN-SNSR-212(NAD) 22 24
A5 2 5 2 (S62) 3 19 19 14 KVRCM
15.2.1 DC Wire Harness
J686 12 RVMEN 3
3.3VF SCST2 SCN-STRT2 6 HRNS-SCN-SNSR-A-212(other) 23 23
24VD3 24VD 11 RVMDIR 4 A6 1 6 1 4 13 13 12 SGND
TRNS-SOL-1 2 3 7 3 14 A2 SCN-START1 7 24 22
EXTSOL EXTSOL 10 RVMVR 5 5 SCST1 2 2 2 CN121 SGND
(SOL1) 1 4 6 4 13 A3 J1010 SC-ACK 8 J005 25 21
9 RT1M2PH 6 UEXPFFN 6 DFAK 1 1 1 +5V EPU UNIT SGND
J687 RT1MCK A7 2 UP-EXIT-FAN-MOT-1 SC-TXD 9 1 1 APS1 26 20
24VD3 24VD 8 7 +24VD3 7 DFRXD 3 3 3 APSR KSH3
2 5 5 5 12 A4 (F32) M SG 10 HRNS-KPU-H380(H385/H386/H387) HRNS-EPU-H385 27 19
PWA-F-LDR
PWA-H-DRV
+5V(RLY) 2 PG 2
J1007 PCIE2-RXP 5V 1 4 1 4
1 3 1 3 13
+5V(RLY) B3
BRGFFN 5 5 5 20 J7 VLX- SG BD BD
3 +24VD3 3
B7 2 BRIDGE-FAN-MOT PCIE2-RXN 1 5 AUG-LOCK-SNR 3 12 3 12 2 3 2 3
J682 +24VD3 6 6 6 5V 19 1 VLX+ Unit USTLCK BDDET BDDET
4 +24VD3 4
B8 1 (F6) M SG 2 4 (S42) 2 13 2 13 3 2 3 2 PWA-F-SNS
RT1MA 7 7 7 NC 18 NC 5VF SG GND
4 4 12 B4 5 SG 5 PCIE2-CLKP 2 3 3 LP-EXPO 1 14 1 14
BRIDGE-ENT-MOT RT1MAB 8 8 SG VLX+ 4 1 4 1
6 5 11 B5 6 SG 6 HRNS-EXTSN-130 8 17 3 4 2 NC 15
(M4) RT1MBB PCIE2-CLKN OHDEN
M 6 10 B6 3.3VF 9 9 9 16 4 VLX- NC
1 7 7 SG TRG 5 1 16 HRNS-POL-H385
RT1MB +5V(RLY) J729 J774 10 10 10 15
3 7 9 B7 8 8 SIO-I2C2-DATA SG 5 HRNS-KPU-H380(H385/H386/H387) HRNS-EPU-H385
SG 11 11
B9 7 1 3 LOW-EXIT-SNR SIO-I2C2-CLK 11 14 6 HRNS-SCN-SYS-370 HRNS-ATC-H380 HRNS-KPU-H382(H388) HRNS-EPU-H388
J683 EXTSTS 12 12 RX0N CN320 J644
RVMA B10 6 2 2 (S63) 12 13 7 J207
4 8 8 B8 +5V SG RX0P J669 J560 B J769 24VD
REV-MOT B11 5 3 1 13 13 13 12 SG(ATSCNT) 1 5 1 5
6 9 7 RVMAB B9 1.8VS SG 8 CN120 CN001 J755 1 6 B3 B10 1 PG POL-MOT
(M3) 14 14 14 11 9 +15V SG(ATS) 2 4 2 4
M 1 10 6 RVMBB B10 J1014 SG LOCKN 1 31 1 2 5 B4 B9 2 POMON (M34)
LEXPFFN 15 15 15 10 10 +15V ATTNR-SNR 3 3 3 3 M
3 11 5 RVMB B11 B12 4 4 2 LOW-EXIT-FAN-MOT-1 HORUS-PLLHW-RST HTPDN 2 30 POMPLL
+24VD3 16 16 16 9 11 NC (S26) J806 4 2 4 2
B13 3 5 1 (F34) M 3 29 ATSN POMCK
HRNS-RLY-EXM-H380 17 HORUS2-PLLS-RST 17 17 SG 8 12 +5V 2 3 4 B5 B8 8 9 24 5 1 5 1
J1015 HORUS2-PCIE-RST# CCDCNT 4 28 24VD
LEXPRFN 18 18 18 7 13 +5V 3 4 3 B6 B7 9 8 25
J691 J684 B14 2 6 HORUS2-LVTX-RST SDEN 5 27 ATSVR
PWA-F-DSDF-CCD
EX1MA EX1MA 2 LOW-EXIT-FAN-MOT-2 19 19 19 6
+24VD3 HORUS2-ARST# 14 +5V 4 5 2 B7 B6 10 7 26
4 1 4 12 4 B12 B15 1 7 1 (F35) M 20 20 SDCLK 6 26 ATSCT
EXIT-MOT EX1MAB EX1MAB GPIO25-HORUS2-EN# 20 5 15 NC 6 1 B8 B5 11 6 27
6 2 3 13 3 B13 21 21 SYSDTOUT 7 25 SG
(M2) EX1MBB EX1MBB 21 4 16 SG 6 11 22
M 1 3 2 14 2 B14 SG AFEDTOUT 8 24 SG
EX1MB EX1MB 22 22 22 3 17 SG 7 10 23
3 4 1 15 1 B15 HRNS-MIDSN-130 12VA SILSEL 9 23
23 23
PWA-F-DSP
CN540 28 28 23 8
J624 J786 SG 15 SG 17 * 85 ppm only
RT2MB SG 29 29 CN84 24
3 1 4 3 4 3 SG 16 OHDEN 16 J756
BRIDGE-EXIT-MOT RT2MBB ADFSN REV-PATH-SNR 30 30
1 2 5 2 5 2 15VCCD 1 25 17 TRIG 15 SG(V0)
(M5) (S59) 31 31 LAMP 3 4
M 6
RT2MAB 3 3.3VF 1 SG 2 26 18 SG 14
6 1 6 32 32 J782
4
RT2MA 4 CLKREQ 27 19 RX0P 13
33 33 V0-SNR-K J806
PWA-F-CCD
HRNS-RGTSN-430 HORUS2CNT 28 20 RX0N 12
34 34 24VD HRNS-LGC-LSU-H385 HRNS-SHT-430
SG 29 SG 1 3 14 19
35 35 21 11 KDRV0
J732 J773 30 LOCKN 2 4 13 20
SG 36 SLGEN 36 22 10 PG CN322
7 3 1 3 RGST-SNR SCNWR 31 HTPDN 4 5 12 21 J213 J214
23 9 LUSTMA
PWA-F-V0
RGSTS
PWA-H-SYS
8 2 2 2 37 37 32 SG 1 8 1 2 SHT-MOT
(S52) SCNRD 24 8 LUSTMB
+5V 1 38 38 CCDCNT 2 7 2 1 (M38) M
9 1 3 AFE-EN 33 25 7
39 39 34
J730 SG 26 SDEN 6 J216
HRNS-ADUM-H380 EXPRFN 40 40 Control SDCLK HRNS-CLNMT-430 SG
10 2 Fuser unit heat LVDSPWDN 27 5 3 6 3 3 SHT-SNR-HP
ADU Unit +24VD2 41 41 LUSCHP
11 1 exhausting fan (F2) M SG Panel 28 SDIN 4 4 5 4 2 (S24)
J832 CN495 42 42 J1 CN116 J757 J667 J560 B 3.3VB
AD1MA SG J8 SG(shield) 29 SDOUT 3 CLNMA 5 4 5 1
4 1 J1003 43 43 1 1 CH-CLN-MOT 2 1 2 B1 B12 1 16 17
ADU-MOT-1 AD1MAB HRNS-PFC-ADU-H380 MEXFN1 SAREGCS2-0 SG 30 SILSEL 2 CLNMA J217
6 2 12 2 Bridge unit heat exhausting fan 44 44 1 2 2
M (M23) 1 2 1 B2 B11 2 15 18
(M7) AD1MBB +24VD2 SAMEMCS2-0 31 RESET 1 SG 3
M 1 3 13 1 (F1) M 45 45 2 CP_CNT-1 6 3 6 SHT-SNR-EP
AD1MB CCDSEL2-0 3 3 J769 LUSCEN
3 4 CN490 A CN361 A 46 46 3 CP_PSW-0 J668 7 2 7 2 (S25)
4 4 SG(CLNSNR) 3.3VB
PWA-F-SYS
A17 AD2MMD A4 12 5 28
M 1 7 1 4 8 8 2 2 B10 B3
AD2MB AD2MCK A5 PFMAB FEED-MOT 51 DEEPCS-0 51 8 5VS-GND 5VF J764
3 8 A16 2 6 9 9 1 B11 B2 13 4 29
ADUFANH A6 PFMBB (M42) 52 SILSEL2 52 12VA 3 EPFN1
A15 3 1 M 10 10 9 2 EPU-FAN-MOT
HRNS-ADU-SNR1-H380 ADUCOV A7 PFMB 53 DFLMPON-0 53 12VA 4 +24VD2 M
A14 10 1 (F14)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4 3 11 11
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
ADUSN0 54 DFRLYCNT-0 54 12VA 5 NC NC NC
CN494 A13 A8 12 12 B12 B1 11
6
CN78
J839 TR2JAM J634 55 SG 55 12VA-GND NC
24VSW A12 A9 1TRMA 13 13 Main Memory 12
1 1 5 SCNDT7 J2 J2 7
PWA-F-LGC
HRNS-DSDF-SYS-370
CN490 B CN361 B J636 SCNAD12 12 25 25 J761
2TRMA 68 68 17 LVDS-TX3P TRCT1 R5 LAN Connector
J814 6 4 SCNAD11 26 26 SG
SG B20
+24VD B1
2TRMAB TRNS-MOT-2 69 69 16 13 LVDS-TX3N TRCT2 R6 3 3 WASTE-TNR-FLL-SNR
ADU-ENT-SNR 3 9 9 4 7 6 SCNAD10 27 27 (10/100/ USTFUL
ADUSN0 B19 PG B2 2TRMBB (M41) 70 70 15 14 LVDS-SG TRD3P R7 HRNS-EPERS-430 HRNS-ERS-H385 HRNS-LGC-UPR-H385 4 2 (S14)
(S66) 2 10 8 5 8 1 M SCNAD9 28 28 J896 +5V
5V B18 +24VD B3
2TRMB 71 71 14 15 LVDS-CLKP TRD3N R8 1000BASE-TX) 5 1
PWA-H-PFC
1 11 7 6 9 3 SCNAD8 29 29 J622 NC CN310
B17 PG B4
72 72 13 16 LVDS-CLKN TRD4P R9 1 4 J711
KERLED KERLED KERLED J760
RX0P
SG
RX0N
RESET
SILSEL
AFEDTOUT
SYSDTOUT
SDCLK
SDEN
CCDCNT
HTPDN
LOCKN
TRG
OHDEN
5V
5V
5V
15V
15V
J815 SCNAD7 17 30 30 2 2 3 1 2 1
SG B16 +24VD B5
73 73 12 LVDS-SG TRD4N R10 LP-ERS SG 3
3 12 6 7 SCNAD6 31 31 +24VD +24VD 24V 6 WASTE-TNR-BOX-SNR
ADU-EXIT-SNR B15 PG B6 11 18 LEDY-C L1 1 3 2 2 1 2 USTDET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LVDS-TX2P
CN90
ADUSN1 74 74
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2 13 5 8 SCNAD5 32 32 NC 7 2 (S16)
(S67) 5V B14 SFBSOL B7
75 75 10 19 LVDS-TX2N LEDY-A L2 4 1 +5V
1 14 4 9 33 33 8 1
B13 SFBMMD1 B8 SCNAD4 76 9 20 LVDS-SG LEDG-C L3
SFBMVR 76 34 34
HRNS-FEXSN-H380 B12 B9 SCNAD3 8 21 LVDS-TX1P LEDG-A L4 J758
77 77 35 35
B11 SG B10 SCNAD2 7 22 TNFN
J816 78 78 LVDS-TX1N HRNS-FRTSW-H380 9 2 DEV-FAN-MOT
J822 FEXSTS FEXSTS SCNAD1 36 36 +24VD
B10 +5V B11 6 23 1 (F25) M
15 - 3
2 1 3 15 3 10 79 79 LVDS-SG 10
37 37
PWA-F-KEY
FUS-TRPT-SNR SG B9 ADUSN1 B12 SCNAD0 5 24 J716 J710
1 2 2 16 2 SG 11 80 80 LVDS-TX0P TNR24V TNR24V
(S65) 5V 25 38 38 J763
3 1 17 1 5V 12 B8 3.3VL B13 4 LVDS-TX0N Wireless LAN 4 4 OZFN
3 39 39 CN109 TNR-MOT-SW TNR24V NC 11 2 OZN-FAN-MOT
B7
FEXSTS B14 3 26 LVDS-SG 3 3 +24VD
PWA-H-ADU
J771 NC 40 40 1 Option (SW3) 12 1 (F24) M
B6 B15 2 27 CP_CNT-1 J715
ADU-FAN-MOT 2 2 ADUFN1 13 ADUMRST B16 1 28 41 41 2 +24VD 24V
B5 2 2 3 J812
M (F11) 1 1 24VD 14 AD1MCK 3 +24VD 24V TEMP
B4 B17 4 13 4
1 1 SG TEMP/HUMI-SNR
B3 AD1MMD B18 4 14 3
HRNS-SFBM-H380 AD1MVR (S12)
B2 B19 CN112 5 HRNS-TNRD-H385 HMS 2
AD1MEN J3 J4 15
J605 CN496 B1 B20 VBUS VBUS 6 +5V 1
4 1 1 WLAN Module 16
SFBMA 1 D- D- 7 J824 J713
4 3 2 2 +24VD TNR24V J762
SFB-MOT SFBMAB HRNS-PFC-FD34-H380 USB connector D+ D+ 8 TNR-MOT 3 1 5 SG
6 2 2 3 3 KTNMT KTNRMT 17 3
(M12) SFBMBB HRNS-PFC-FDTM-H380 NC 9 M (M15) 2 2 4 5 WASTE-TNRA-MOT-SNR
M 1 3 4 4 18 USTNFL 2
SG SG 10 (S13)
3
SFBMBB 4
1 5 5 J825 19 +5V 1
CN352 J842 11 SG SG
E C3TRCL TNR-SNR 3 3 3 6 E
1 3 CST3-TR-CLT 12 KCRGSW KCRGSW
HRNS-SFBSW-430 HRNS-ADU-SFB-H380 +24VD2 (S8) 2 4 2 7
2 1 (CLT4) 5V 5V
J603 1 5 1 8
NC NC HRNS-LGC-POS-H385 HRNS-POS-H385
1 4 CN498 J843
J613 SG C3TRCL
SG 1 3 3 CST3-FEED-CLT CN309 A
SFB-SNR 3 2 3 +24VD2 NC CN311 J743 J747
SFBSW 3 2
SFBSW 2 4 1 (CLT5) J612 A1 5V +5V
(S71) 2 HRNS-PFC-OLCF-H380 J4 J4 CN112 TBMBK 1 6 1 4
+5V 3.3VL 3 9 A2 RGRCNTR TNSCVR IMG-POS-SNR
1 4 1 VBUS 1 24V 2 5 2 3
1 10 TBU-MOT 8 A3 (S21)
CN353 A D- 2 USB connector RGCREF RGCVREF 2
HRNS-SFBSIZE-430 NC * Only for CST Model 2 9 HRNS-LGC-COIN-210 (M13) 24V 3 4 3
J894 J844 7 A4 SG SG
A1 C4TRCL(NC) 3 8 D+ 3 (Front) PG 4 3 4 1
J619 J614 SG 14 5 3 6 A5
SFSIZE3 A2 +24VD2(NC) CST4-TR-CLT 4 7 SG 4 J804 CN306 PG
5 1 5 4 PG 6 1 (CLT6) TEN-KEY SG 5 A6
SFSIZE2 A3 15 5 NC M TBMPLL
SFB-SIZE-SNR 2 4 5 6 TEN-KEY - 1 4 A7 J744
4 A4 LCFMCK-1A 16 NC CTRCNT1 TBMDIR TNLSOL TNLSOL
SFSIZE1 6 LCFPM1-0A J845 6 5 Option - 2 3 A8 5 2 5 2
(S70) 3 3 3 A5 17 C4TRCL(NC) NC 24V TBMCK 24VD 24VD SNR-SHUT-SOL
SFSIZE0 LCPCLT-0A 7 3 CST4-FEED-CLT 7 4 USBHUB - 3 2 A9 6 1 6
2 4 2 7 A6 18 +24VD2(NC) CN109 NC KCTRON 1 (SOL3)
SG 8 1 (CLT7) 8 3 - 4 TBMON
1 5 1 8 LCFCLT-0A 9 NC VBUS 1 1 A10
A7 9 9 2 24V
LCFDMB-0A D- 2 USB connector 1 5 J798 HRNS-TBJAM-H380
J617 A8 20 10 CTRON
24VD LCFDMA-0A 1 D+ 3 2 6 FSMBK
SFB-SOL 2 9 A9 21 (Device) CTRCNT1 9 A11
SFBSOL LCTRMB-0A SG 4 3 7 FUS-MOT +24VD1 J749 J750
(SOL8) 1 10 A10 22 J841 MCRUN 8 A12 SG SG
LCTRMA-0A FD2MBK 4 8 (M6) +24VD1 7 3 1 3 CLNG-SNR
A11 23 10 9 EXTCTR 7 A13 TBJAM TBJAM1-0
HRNS-SFBFED-430 +24VD2 +24VD3 FED/TR-MOT CN114 5 9 PG 8 2 2 2 (S47)
A12 24 11 8 PG 6 A14 3.3VL +3.3V
+24VD3 (M43) VBUS 1 6 10 PG 9 1 3 1
J606 J604 12 7 NC BKCTR 5 A15
SG SG CN353 B PG D- 2 USB connector - 11 M FSMRDY
3 1 3 11 +24VD2 13 6 NC MNCTR 4 A16
SFB-FEED-SNR SFBFDT SFBFDT B1 3 PG D+ 3 - 12 FSMDIR
(S72) 2 2 2 12 LCFINT-0 Option LCF 14 5 (Inner) NC FLCTR 3 A17
5V 3.3VL 13 B2 4 FD2SYN M SG 4 - 13 FSMCK
1 3 1 LCFMPL-1 15 4 FAX Option HRNS-FAXUSB-H370 NC SG 2 A18
B3 5 FD2DIR - 14 FSMON
LCPICK-0 16 3 NC SIZE3 1 A19
B4 6 FD2MCK CN117 - 15
LCTRUP-1 17 2 (CN101) NC SIZE2
B5 7 FD2MON (JK400) VCC - 16
LCBTH-0 18 1 VBUS 1 NC SIZE1 CN309 B
B6 8 1 LOCK SYS-FAN-MOT - 17 J799
LCTRPS-0 1 D- NC SIZE0 FSRPOSMTB-0
B7 9 2 2 FUS-CR-MOT 2 B1
LCPEMP-1 2 D+ GND (F27) M - 18 FSRPOSMTA-0
B8 10 3 3 5V M (M48) 1 B2
LCSET-0 HRNS-PFC-SIZE12-H380 HRNS-PSIZE-430 3 ID(NC) 11 19
B9 11 4 NC CTRCNT2
LCDET-0 ASYB-SPK-H370 HRNS-FAX-SPK-H370 4 GND - 20 J795
B10 12 CN358 J848 J852 5 5 PLRFN
VDD SG LSU-FAN-MOT-R 2 B3
Coin Controller / Card Controller
Tandem-LCF Type
CN360 B HRNS-PFC-CST4-H380 2 16 16 PG
LVPS
4 drawers Type
TLCF-STPR-SNR-F 3 12 12 B12 7 11 2 (S83) (S99) 2 11 7 11 NC B7 KDVMDIR 3
TLCSTP2 B13 3.3VF J853 1
(S111) 2 11 11 B13 3.3VF 6 12 1 1 12 6 12 P4SIZE7 NC FSRCNT-1 FSRCNTP-1 B8 KDVMCLK 2
+3.3V B14 B4 10 4 5 2 13 1 12
1 10 10 J725 P4SIZE6 CST4-SIZE-SNR-1 NC IC8 J717 B9 KDVMON 1
J725 B5 9 5 4 3 24VD
J640 SG SG 1 11
3 13 5 13 SG (S103)
HDD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
15.2.2 Electric Parts Layout
[A]-1 Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF) [A]-2 Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF) [A]-3 Dual Scan Document Feeder (DSDF) [B] Scanner unit, control panel [C] Bridge unit_Paper exit [D]-1 Fuser related section
SD16 S3
F6
SWD1
S55 THM6
KEY M6
SW5
EXP
S61
DSP F21
S60 S48
TCP SOL1
S63
SD8 SD7 CLD
SD6 MD2 CCDD LEDD THMO4
S56
SD12 SD4 SOL2
SD11 SD5
SD10 SD13 SD14 SD15
[D]-2 Fuser related section [E]-1 Developer unit [E]-2 Developer unit [E]-3 Developer unit [F] Transfer belt unit [G] Transfer unit
IH-COIL
M19
F17
S30
M39
S47
SOL3
S26
S52
S12
M29 V0S
M30
S21
[H] Laser unit [I] Toner cartridge/Waste toner box [J] Automatic duplexing unit [K] Cover switches/Cover sensor [L] Bypass feed unit [M]-1 Paper feeding section
SW8
S8
SW9
M7
LDR-K SW3
M8
M15
SOL8
ADU M40
SW2
M42
M12
M41
LED CLT4
F22
SW4 CLT5
CLT6
S42 CLT7
S80 S79
S25 M33
S38 S82
S24 S70 S88
SW1 S87
M38 S90
S14 S98
S66 S96 S95 M45
S13 S114
S16 S72 M44
SNS S67 S104 S103
[M]-2 Paper feeding section [N] Tandem LCF [O] PC boards [P] Power supply [Q] Fans [R] Damp heater
SYS DH1
DH3
S108 F32
F2 THMO1
F1
F34
F33
S111 DSDF-I/F
F35
M47
S73 F36
LGC
S75 HVT
S76 SOL9
S81
S83 S106 M46
S84
S89 PFC
S77 S91
S78 S92
S112 SOL11 DAMP
S85 PS
S97
S86
S99 S107
S93 S100 F25
S94 S110 FIL-AC
S109 HDD F37
S101 F24
SOL10 F27 F14
S102 S113
Motors
Symbol Name Figure Wire harness Symbol Name Figure Wire harness Symbol Name Figure Wire harness Symbol Name Figure Wire harness
location location location location
Symbol Name Figure Wire harness
location
LOW-EXIT-FAN-MOT-2 UP-EXIT-SNR DSDF AC Wire
F35 Lower exit section cooling fan (front) [Q] 3-C S61 Upper paper exit sensor [C] 3-A SWD2 DSDF upper cover interlock switch [A]-1 Harness DH1 Scanner damp heater (Left) [R] Harness
DSDF
MD1 DSDF feed motor [A]-2 Harness Diagram
Diagram F36 LOW-EXIT-FAN-MOT-3 [Q] 8-D S62 UP-EXIT-FULL-SNR [C] 3-B DH3 Drum damp heater [R] AC Wire
Lower exit section cooling fan (under) Upper exit tray paper full detection sensor SW1 MAIN-SW [K] AC Wire Harness
DSDF Main power switch Harness
MD2 DSDF separation motor [A]-2 Harness PS-FAN-MOT-1 LOW-EXIT-SNR
F37
Power supply unit cooling fan
[P] 2-D S63
Lower paper exit sensor
[C] 3-C
AC Wire Thermistors and thermostats
Diagram SW2 Interlock switch [J]
Harness
ADU-OPEN-SNR Symbol Name Figure Wire harness
DSDF Sensors S64 [J] 1-D location
MD3 DSDF registration motor [A]-2 Harness Duplexing unit opening/closing detection sensor TNR-MOT-SW
SW3 Toner motor interlock switch [K] 7-E
Diagram Symbol Name Figure Wire harness FUS-TRPT-SNR THM1 THMS-DRM [E]-2 7-B
location S65 [D]-1 1-E Drum thermistor
DSDF Fuser transport sensor SW4 IH interlock switch [J] AC Wire
MD4 DSDF read motor [A]-2 Harness DSDF Harness PHETHTHMS-FBLT-C
SD1 DSDF tray original length sensor-1 [A]-1 Harness ADU-ENT-SNR THM5 Fuser belt center thermistor [D]-1 7-H
Diagram S66 [J] 1-D
Diagram Duplexing unit path entrance sensor SW5 REV-PATH-OPEN-SW [C] 3-B
DSDF Reverse path cover switch PHETHTHMS-FBLT-E
ADU-EXIT-SNR THM6 [D]-1 7-H
MD5 DSDF exit motor [A]-2 Harness DSDF S67 [J] 1-D Fuser belt edge thermistor
SD2 DSDF tray original length sensor-2 [A]-1 Harness Duplexing unit path exit sensor ADU-SET-SW
Diagram SW7 Duplexing unit interlock switch / Duplexing unit [J] 1-D AC Wire
Diagram SFB-SIZE-SNR THMO1 Scanner damp heater thermostat [R]
SCAN-MOT S70 [L] 1-E cover opening/closing detection switch Harness
M1 [B] 6-A DSDF Bypass paper size detection sensor
Scan motor REV-PATH-COV-SW AC Wire
SD3 DSDF tray original width sensor [A]-1 Harness SFB-SNR SW8 [K] 3-B THMO4 Fuser belt thermostat [D]-1
EXIT-MOT Diagram S71 [L] 1-E Bridge unit connecting detection switch Harness
M2 [C] 1-C Bypass paper sensor
Exit motor FRONT-COV-SW
DSDF SFB-FEED-SNR SW9 [K] 3-B Transformer
REV-MOT SD4 DSDF original empty sensor [A]-1 Harness S72 [L] 1-F Front cover opening/closing detection switch
M3 [C] 1-C Bypass feed sensor
Reverse motor Diagram Symbol Name Figure Wire harness
Electromagnetic spring clutches location
S73 CST1-SNR [M]-2 2-G
BRIDGE-ENT-MOT DSDF 1st drawer detection sensor
M4 [C] 1-C PS-HVT
Bridge unit transport entrance motor SD5 DSDF feed sensor [A]-1 Harness Symbol Name Figure Wire harness HVT High-voltage transformer [P] 8-G
Diagram CST1-BTM-SNR location
BRIDGE-EXIT-MOT S74 [M]-1 4-F
M5 [C] 1-C 1st drawer bottom sensor DSDF Har- Others
Bridge unit transport exit motor DSDF CLD DSDF tray-up clutch [A]-2
SD6 DSDF registration sensor [A]-1 Harness CST1-EMP-SNR ness Diagram
M6
FUS-MOT
[D]-1 7-F Diagram S75 1st drawer empty sensor [M]-2 2-G Symbol Name Figure Wire harness
Fuser motor CST3-TR-CLT location
CLT4 3rd drawer transport clutch [M]-1 4-E
DSDF CST1-TRY-SNR DSDF
ADU-MOT-1 SD7 DSDF original width detection sensor-1 [A]-1 Harness S76 1st drawer tray-up sensor [M]-2 2-G
M7 ADU transport motor [J] 1-D CST3-FEED-CLT CCDD DSDF-CCD module [A]-3 Harness
Diagram CLT5 [M]-1 4-E Diagram
CST1-TRNS-SNR 3rd drawer feed clutch
ADU-MOT-2 DSDF S77 [M]-2 2-G
M8 [J] 1-D 1st drawer transport sensor CST4-TR-CLT TCP
ADU feed motor SD8 DSDF original width detection sensor-2 [A]-1 Harness CLT6 [M]-1 4-E TCP [B] 5-D
4th drawer transport clutch Touch panel
Diagram CST1-FEED-SNR
SFB-MOT S78 1st drawer feed sensor [M]-2 2-G
M12 Bypass motor [L] 1-E CST4-FEED-CLT HDD
DSDF CLT7 [M]-1 4-E HDD [O] 5-H
4th drawer feed clutch Hard disk
SD9 DSDF tray lift upper limit sensor [A]-1 Harness CST1-SIZE-SNR-1
TBU-MOT S79 1st drawer paper width detection sensor [M]-1 4-F
M13 [F] 7-E Diagram PS-ACC
Transfer belt motor Solenoids PS [P] 6-G
Switching regulator
DSDF S80 CST1-SIZE-SNR-2 [M]-1 4-F Wire harness
M15 TNR-MOT [I] 7-E SD10 DSDF tray lift lower limit sensor [A]-1 Harness 1st drawer paper length detection sensor Symbol Name Figure
Toner motor location
Diagram
CST2-SNR TRNS-SOL-1
SUB-HOP-MOT S81 2nd drawer detection sensor [M]-2 2-H
M19 [E]-3 7-B DSDF SOL1 Transport path switching solenoid (bridge unit/ [C] 1-B
Sub-hopper toner motor SD11 DSDF read-in sensor-1 [A]-1 Harness
CST2-BTM-SNR reverse section)
CH-CLN-MOT Diagram S82 [M]-1 4-G
M23 [E]-3 6-D 2nd drawer bottom sensor TRNS-SOL-2
Needle electrode cleaner motor DSDF
CST2-EMP-SNR SOL2 Transport path switching solenoid (upper exit/ [C] 1-B
DRM-MOT SD12 DSDF read-in sensor-2 [A]-1 Harness S83 [M]-2 2-H lower exit)
M27 [E]-1 8-H Diagram 2nd drawer empty sensor
Drum motor
CST2-TRY-SNR SNR-SHUT-SOL
K-DEV-MIX-MOT DSDF S84 [M]-2 2-H SOL3 Image quality shutter solenoid [G] 8-E
M29 [E]-1 8-G SD13 DSDF exit sensor [A]-1 Harness 2nd drawer tray-up sensor
Developer unit mixer motor
Diagram CST2-TRNS-SNR V0-SHUT-SOL
DEV-MOT S85 [M]-2 2-H SOL4 V0 sensor shutter solenoid [E]-3 7-B
M30 [E]-1 8-H DSDF 2nd drawer transport sensor
Developer unit motor
SD14 DSDF shading sheet HP sensor [A]-1 Harness CST2-FEED-SNR SFB-SOL
Diagram S86 [M]-2 2-H SOL8 [L] 1-F
M33 WASTE-TNR-TRPT-MOT [I] 8-D 2nd drawer feed sensor Bypass pickup solenoid
Waste toner transport motor
DSDF lower cover opening/closing detection DSDF CST2-SIZE-SNR-1 TLCF-SOL
POL-MOT SD15 [A]-1 Harness S87 [M]-1 4-G SOL9 T-LCF pickup solenoid [N] 3-G
M34 [H] 8-C sensor 2nd drawer paper width detection sensor
Polygonal motor Diagram
CST2-SIZE-SNR-2 TLCF-STPR-SOL-F
SHT-MOT DSDF S88 [M]-1 4-G SOL10 T-LCF Stopper opening/closing solenoid (front) [N] 1-H
M38 [H] 8-C DSDF upper cover opening/closing detection 2nd drawer paper length detection sensor
Shutter motor SD16 [A]-1 Harness
sensor Diagram
S89 CST3/LCF-SNR [M]-2 3-G SOL11 TLCF-STPR-SOL-R [N] 1-H
M39 RGST-MOT [G] 2-D 3rd drawer/T-LCF detection sensor T-LCF Stopper opening/closing solenoid (rear)
Registration motor APS1
S1 Automatic original detection sensor-1 [B] 6-B
S90
CST3-BTM-SNR
[M]-1 4-G
PC boards
TRNS-MOT-1 3rd drawer bottom sensor
M40 Transport motor-1 [M]-1 2-D APS2 Wire harness
S2 [B] 6-B Symbol Name Figure location
Automatic original detection sensor-2 CST3/LCF-EMP-SNR
TRNS-MOT-2 S91 3rd drawer/T-LCF empty sensor [M]-2 3-G
M41 Transport motor-2 [M]-1 2-D HOME-SNR 4-C, DSDF
S3 Carriage home position sensor [B] 6-B DLGD DSDF control PC board [A]-3 Harness
S92 CST3/LCF-TRY-SNR [M]-2 3-F
M42 FEED-MOT [M]-1 2-D 3rd drawer/T-LCF tray-up sensor Diagram
1st/2nd drawer feed motor PLTN-SNR1
S4 Platen sensor-1 [B] 6-B DSDF
CST3/LCF-TRNS-SNR
FED/TR-MOT S93 3rd drawer/T-LCF transport sensor [M]-2 3-G LEDD DSDF-LED PC board [A]-3 Harness
M43 3rd/4th drawer/LCF feed motor [M]-1 4-F PLTN-SNR2
S5 [B] 6-B Diagram
Platen sensor-2 CST3/LCF-FEED-SNR
CST-TRY-MOT-1 S94 3rd drawer/T-LCF feed sensor [M]-2 3-G PWA-F-CCD
M44 1st/2nd drawer tray-up motor [M]-1 4-G TNR-SNR CCD [A]-3 6-C
S8 [I] 7-E CCD driving PC board (CCD board)
Toner cartridge paddle rotation detection sensor CST3-SIZE-SNR-1
CST-TRY-MOT-2 S95 [M]-1 4-G PWA-F-DSP
M45 [M]-1 4-H 3rd drawer paper width detection sensor DSP [B] 5-C
3rd/4th drawer/LCF tray-up motor TEMP/HUMI-SNR Display PC board (DSP board)
S12 Temperature/humidity sensor [E]-2 8-E
CST3-SIZE-SNR-2
TLCF-TRY-MOT S96 3rd drawer paper length detection sensor [M]-1 4-H PWA-F-KEY
M46 T-LCF tray-up motor [N] 1-G WASTE-TNRA-MOT-SNR KEY [B] 5-E
S13 [I] 8-E Key PC board (KEY board)
Waste toner amount detection sensor CST4-SNR
TLCF-END-MOT S97 4th drawer detection sensor [M]-2 3-H PWA-F-CTIF
M47 T-LCF end fence motor [N] 1-F WASTE-TNR-FLL-SNR CTIF [I] 8-F
S14 [I] 8-D Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF board)
Waste toner box full detection sensor CST4-BTM-SNR
M48 Pressure roller contact/release motor [D]-1 7-F S98 [M]-1 4-H PWA-F-CTRG
4th drawer bottom sensor CTRG [I] 8-F
WASTE-TNR-BOX-SNR Toner cartridge PC board (CTRG board))
S16 Waste toner detection sensor [I] 8-D
Fans S99
CST4-EMP-SNR
[M]-2 3-H
4th drawer empty sensor PWA-F-SYS
Wire harness IMG-POS-SNR SYS System control PC board (SYS board) [O] 4-A, 5-D
Symbol Name Figure location S21 [G] 8-E
Image quality sensor CST4-TRY-SNR
S100 4th drawer tray-up sensor [M]-2 3-H PWA-H-LGC
DSDF SHT-SNR-HP LGC Logic PC board (LGC board) [O] 2-A, 4-A, 8-D
FD1 DSDF cooling fan motor [A]-2 Harness S24 Shutter sensor (home position) [H] 8-C
S101 CST4-TRNS-SNR [M]-2 3-H
Diagram 4th drawer transport sensor SNS PWA-F-SNS [H] 8-B
SHT-SNR-EP H-sync detection PC board (SNS board)
F1 Bridge unit heat exhausting fan [Q] 2-B S25 Shutter sensor (end position) [H] 8-D
CST4-FEED-SNR
S102 4th drawer feed sensor [M]-2 3-H PWA-F-LDR
F2 Fuser unit heat exhausting fan [Q] 3-B ATTNR-SNR LDR-K Laser driving PC board (LDR-K board) [H] 8-B
S26 [E]-2 6-C
Auto-toner sensor CST4-SIZE-SNR-1
F6 BRIDGE-FAN-MOT [C] 2-B S103 [M]-1 4-H PWA-F-V0
Bridge unit cooling fan 4th drawer paper width detection sensor
CH-CLN-SNR V0S Drum surface potential sensors control PC board [E]-3 7-C
S30 Needle electrode cleaner detection sensor [E]-2 7-D
CST4-SIZE-SNR-2 (V0S board)
IH-FAN-MOT-1 S104 [M]-1 4-H
F8 IH board cooling fan (exhaust) [D]-2 7-F 4th drawer paper length detection sensor
V0-SNR-K PWA-H-PFC
S34 Drum surface potential (V0) sensor [E]-2 7-C PFC [O] 1-A, 2-D
TLCF-STTBY-AMUT-SNR Paper feeding control PC board (PFC board)
IH-FAN-MOT-2
F9 IH board cooling fan (suction) [D]-2 7-G S106 T-LCF standby side tray paper amount detection [N] 1-G
S38 SUB-HOP-TNR-SNR-K [I] 7-D sensor PWA-H-ADU
Sub-hopper toner sensor ADU ADU control PC board (ADU board) [J] 2-E
F11 ADU-FAN-MOT [J] 1-E
Reversed paper cooling fan TLCF-BTM-SNR
AUG-LOCK-SNR S107 T-LCF bottom sensor [N] 1-H PWA-H-DRV
S42 [I] 7-B DRV [C] 2-B
Auger lock detection sensor DRV PC board
F14 EPU-FAN-MOT [Q] 8-D
EPU cooling fan S108 TLCF-STBY-TRY-SNR [N] 1-F
CLNG-SNR T-LCF standby side tray detection sensor PWA-H-IH
S47 Transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor [G] 8-F IH [D]-2 7-F
Heater control PC board (IH board)
EPU-FAN-MOT-K
F17 Mixing ozone fan [E]-3 7-B TLCF-STTBY-EMP-SNR
PRPOS-SNR S109 [N] 1-G
S48
Pressure roller contact/release detection sensor
[D]-1 7-H T-LCF standby side empty sensor RAM-S PWA-F-SRAM-S [O] 6-H
SRAM board <for SYS board>
F21 TNR-CTRG-FAN-MOT [D]-1 7-A
Fuser insulation fan TLCF-STPR-SNR-R
S49 HRLOCK-SNR [D]-1 7-H S110 T-LCF stopper opening/closing detection sensor [N] 1-H PWA-H-DAMP
Fuser belt rotation detection sensor DAMP DAMP board (DAMP board) [O] 6-G
LSU-FAN-MOT-F (front)
F22 [H] 7-A
Laser optical unit cooling fan (Front) TR2-CLNG-SNR AC Wire
S51 [G] 1-D TLCF-STPR-SNR-F FIL-AC Filter PC board (FIL board) [O]
2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor S111 T-LCF stopper opening/closing detection sensor [N] 1-H Harness
LSU-FAN-MOT-R
F23 Laser optical unit cooling fan (Rear) [H] 7-F (rear)
S52 RGST-SNR [G] 3-C 3-C, DSDF
Registration sensor DSDF-I/
TLCF-HOME-SNR F DSDF Interface board (DSDF-I/F) [O] Harness
F24 OZN-FAN-MOT [Q] 8-E S112 [N] 1-G Diagram
Ozone suctioning fan BRIDGE-ENT-SNR T-LCF end fence home position sensor
S55 [C] 1-B
Bridge unit path entrance sensor
DEV-FAN-MOT S113
TLCF-STP-SNR
[N] 1-G Lamps, coils, and heaters
F25 [Q] 8-E T-LCF end fence stop position sensor
Scattered toner suctioning fan BRIDGE-EXIT-SNR
S56 Bridge unit path exit sensor [C] 1-B Symbol Name Figure Wire harness
SYS-FAN-MOT FEED-COV-SNR location
F27 [O] 6-F S114 [K] 7-A
SYS board cooling fan REV-PATH-SNR Feed cover sensor
S57 [C] 1-B EXP LP-EXPO [B] 6-B
Reverse path sensor Exposure lamp
F32 UP-EXIT-FAN-MOT-1 [Q] 2-B Switches
Upper exit section cooling fan (rear) REV-JAM-SNR LP-ERS
S58 [C] 1-B
UP-EXIT-FAN-MOT-2
Reverse section stationary jam detection sensor Symbol Name Figure Wire harness ERS-K Discharge LED [E]-3 7-D
F33 [Q] 2-B location
Upper exit section cooling fan (front) REV-SNR PWA-F-LED
S59 Reverse sensor [C] 3-C DSDF LED [J] 7-A
LOW-EXIT-FAN-MOT-1 SWD1 DSDF lower cover interlock switch [A]-1 Harness Fuser unit jam releasing LED
F34 Lower exit section cooling fan (rear) [Q] 3-C
REV-JAM-SNR Diagram
S60
Reverse section paper transport detection sensor
[C] 3-B IH-COIL IH-COIL [D]-2 AC Wire
IH coil Harness
15 - 4
15.2.3
DSDF original width detection sensor-1 (SD7) J972 DSDF-CCD module (CCDD)
DSDF original width detection sensor-2 (SD8) J973 DSDF control PC board (DLGD) CN91 CN88 CCD
CN77
J975 CN76
DSDF tray lift upper limit sensor (SD9) J976
CN75 CN79 CN78 J992 DSDF separation motor (MD2)
CN71 CN70 CN72 CN86 CN85 CN84 CN80 J982 DSDF-LED PC board (LEDD)
DSDF read-in sensor-1 (SD11) J983
J956
15 - 5
DSDF read-in sensor-2 (SD12) J984 J958 DSDF cooling fan motor (FD1)
Fig.15-2
DSDF exit sensor (SD13) J985 CN995 DSDF contrl PC board cooling fan motor (FD2)
J957
DSDF tray lift lower limit sensor (SD10) J986 J959 DSDF tray-up clutch (CLD)
DSDF shading sheet HP sensor (SD14) J979
J953
DSDF lower cover opening/closing detection sensor (SD15) DSDF upper cover interlock switch (SWD2)
J980
DSDF upper cover opening/closing detection sensor (SD16) J981 J954 J955 DSDF lower cover interlock switch (SWD1)
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION
15
e-STUDIO5508A/6508A/7508A/8508A © 2016 - 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION
15 - 6
REVISION RECORD
Ver04
Ver. 04 <2019.04.10>
Page Contents
8-104 The troubleshooting has been corrected. (E120)
8-148 The troubleshooting has been corrected. (E860)
9-13 A note has been corrected.
9-16 A note has been added.
Ver03
Ver. 03 <2019.03.27>
Page Contents
3-35 The description has been corrected. (DRV PC board)
3-106 to 3-110 The description has been corrected. (DSDF)
4-129 The notes have been changed.
4-206 to 4-212 The procedure has been changed.
(Fuser belt center thermistor (THM5) / edge thermistor (THM6) / thermostat (THMO4))
5-1 “36 CLONING” and “37 LICENSE MANAGEMENT” have been added.
5-2 “36 CLONING” and “37 LICENSE MANAGEMENT” have been added.
5-4 Fig.5-3 has been replaced.
5-5 Fig.5-4 has been replaced.
5-7 Fig.5-6 has been replaced.
5-25 Fig.5-22 has been replaced.
5-26 Fig.5-23 has been replaced.
5-27 Fig.5-24 has been replaced.
5-28 Fig.5-25 has been replaced.
5-29 Fig.5-26 has been replaced.
5-30 “36 CLONING” and “37 LICENSE MANAGEMENT” have been added.
5-33 “HDD Data Restore” have been added. Fig.5-29 has been replaced.
5-36 to 5-37 The description has been added. ([I] / [J] / [K])
5-39 to 5-40 The description has been changed. (5.17.3 Functions)
5-45 The description has been changed. ([D] Initialize the DB (Initialize DB))
6-88 to 6-89 “Adjustment of Horizontal Position” has been added.
7-6 Fig.7-2 has been replaced.
7-40 to 7-41 The preventive maintenance checklist has been changed.
7-53 The mistake has been corrected (development sleeve → developer sleeve).
8-19 The contents of EA27 has been changed.
8-31 The contents of CB00 has been changed. The CB01 error has been deleted.
8-38 The F101_11 and F101_12 errors have been added.
8-39 The F106_11 and F106_12 errors have been added.
8-41 The F128 error has been added.
8-48 The 2C50 error has been added.
8-50 The 2D50 error has been added.
8-52 The 2E50 error has been added.
8-57 The 4222 and 4223 errors have been added.
8-75 The 71BE and 71BF errors have been added.
8-76 The 71E0 error has been added.
8-79 to 8-80 The 7332 to 7445 errors have been added.
8-83 The 80B1 to 80B5 errors have been added.
8-87 The mistakes has been corrected. (Error code display media: D321)
8-89 to 8-97 “Fax error” has been added.
Ver02
Ver. 02 <2018.02.14>
Page Contents
General The description has been deleted.
precautions
3-29 The numbers for P-I have been corrected.
3-31 The symbols for name have been corrected.
3-33 The symbols for function have been corrected.
3-80 to 3-81 The description has been added. (Toner near-empty / toner empty display adjustment)
Ver. 00
Ver00 <2016.06.24>
Page Contents
- Initial release